Acura RL Manual

2005 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents
Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 57
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Features ............................................................................................................................................ 161
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 247
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 261
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 289
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 335
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 363
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 377
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 381
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be

considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS
STREET This Owner’s Manual covers all
models of the Acura RL. You may
find descriptions of equipment and
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ features that are not on your
POSTAL CODE particular model.
V. I. N.
The information and specifications
DELIVERY DATE included in this publication were in
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
ADDRESS or design at any time without notice
STREET and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
Introduction
Congratulations on your selection of the 2005 Acura RL. We are certain you As you read this manual, you will
will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the find information that is preceded by
world. a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to avoid damage to your vehicle, other
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and property, or the environment.
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time. California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet WARNING: This product contains
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights or emits chemicals known to the
and responsibilities. State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual reproductive harm.
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff Event Data Recorders
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer This vehicle is equipped with one or
any questions and concerns. more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING CONSOLE＊1 MIRROR CONTROL

INDICATORS AUTO BUTTON
DRIVING POSITION (P.122)
MEMORY SYSTEM (P.60)
(P.124) AIRBAGS
(P.11, 24)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
POWER DOOR (P.162)
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
(P.116) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.171)
POWER WINDOW INTERFACE DIAL

SWITCHES (P.163, 171, 208)
(P.145)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.265)
＊1:
OnStar BUTTONS (P.217) ACCESSORY
HomeLink BUTTONS (P.204) TRUNK RELEASE POWER SOCKETS
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.148) BUTTON (P.156)
POWER REAR (P.117)
SUNSHADE BUTTON(P.158) FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HOOD RELEASE LEVER
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT BUTTON (P.251)
TILT BUTTON (P.120) (P.249)
4
INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD HAZARD WARNING

PANEL BRIGHTNESS WIPER/WASHER BUTTON
(P.109) (P.102) (P.109)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.267)
HEADLIGHTS/ PASSENGER AIRBAG
TURN SIGNAL/FOG OFF INDICATOR
LIGHTS (P.33)
(P.104)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.110) /
HEATED MIRROR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) BUTTON (P.123)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.282) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.201)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SEAT HEATER

SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH SWITCHES
(P.108) (P.142) /
SEAT HEATER AND
HANDSFREELINKTM HORN SEAT VENTILATION
MIRROR CONTROLS BUTTONS BUTTONS＊2
(P.123) (P.231) (P.143)
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.111) AUDIO CONTROLS (P.198) BUTTONS
＊3
MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS (P.69)
＊2 : Canadian models only

＊3 : Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
5
6
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 21 Back Seat .................................. 37
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 21 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 37

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 22 Children .................................... 39
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 39
Your Airbags ............................ 24 Additional Safety Precautions .... 40
Airbag System Components ....... 24 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 41
Work.......................................... 27 Protecting Infants ........................ 41
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30 Protecting Small Children .......... 42
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 How Your Side Curtain Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 43
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 Airbags Work ........................... 32 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 44
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32 With LATCH ................................ 45
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 How the Side Airbag Off With a Seat Belt ........................... 47
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 14 Indicator Works ....................... 33 With a Tether ............................... 49
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 15 How the Passenger Airbag Protecting Larger Children ............ 50
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16 Off Indicator Works ................ 33 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 50
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Airbag Service .............................. 34 Using a Booster Seat ................... 51
Belts ...................................... 17 Additional Safety Precautions .... 35 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children − General Front .......................................... 52
Position ................................. 18 Guidelines ................................. 36 Additional Safety Precautions .... 53
Advice for Pregnant Women .......... 19 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54
Additional Safety Precautions ........ 20 Restrained ................................ 36 Safety Labels .................................... 55
7
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. can cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page occupants who sit too close to them, the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the or are not properly restrained. risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. Infants, young children, and short occur at lower speeds. Never drive
adults are at the greatest risk. Be faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt sure to follow all instructions and conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in warnings in this manual. maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts, Don’t Drink and Drive Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, one drink can reduce your ability to Having a tire blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers respond to changing conditions, and mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and your reaction time gets worse with hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 17 ). every additional drink. So don’t drink of such problems, check your tire
and drive, and don’t let your friends pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either. and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should maintenance (see page 298 ).
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
can use the belt properly without a
booster (see pages 50 − 53 ).
8
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(8) (9) (3) (4) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
(10) (6) (9) during a crash.

(1) Some features do not require any
(7) action on your part. These include a
(6) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
(8) (2)
seat belts in a crash.
(7) (11) However, you and your passengers

(5) can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(2) (7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(10) Door Locks yourself and your passengers.
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
9
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
10
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to Your vehicle also has side curtain
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the torso of the driver or airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and a front seat passenger during a the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat moderate to severe side impact. For passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to more information, see page 30 . positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision. For more severe side impact. For more
information, see page 27 . information, see page 32 .
CONTINUED
11
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
12
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door monitor

The following pages provide indicator on the multi-information
instructions on how to properly display to indicate when a specific
protect the driver, adult door or the trunk is not tightly closed.

passengers, and teenage children You will see the appropriate light/
who are large enough and mature lights and the message for each
enough to drive or ride in the front. condition.
See pages 36 − 40 for important

guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
1. Close and Lock the Doors the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
After everyone has entered the stay on.
vehicle, be sure the doors are
closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not

tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
indicator will stay on.
CONTINUED
13
Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent

an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 130 for how to lock the

When both the trunk and one or doors.
more doors are not tightly closed, Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
the ‘‘DOOR & TRUNK OPEN’’ rear as possible while allowing you to
indicator will stay on. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
14
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious

wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure
steering wheel in and out (see page the seat is locked in position.
111 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 119 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED
15
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their
death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 120 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See page 119 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible.
16
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the

belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
CONTINUED
17
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

RELEASE
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
BUTTON behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats,
properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways,
an anchor, press and hold the release or puts one or both feet up, the
buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page 21 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts greatly increased.
positions). and how to take care of them.
18
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding

vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
19
Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Two people should never use the from the airbag covers. If your
same seat belt. If they do, they hands or arms are close to an
could be very seriously injured in a airbag cover, they could be injured
crash. if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper
reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

between yourself and a front near a front door. If a side airbag
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
objects on your lap, or driving with cup holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
20
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If you continue driving without To unlock the belt, press the red
Your seat belt system includes lap/ fastening your seat belt, the beeper PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
shoulder belts in all five seating will sound and the indicator will flash the belt across your body so that it
positions. The front seat belts are again at regular intervals. You will retracts completely. After exiting the

also equipped with automatic seat also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
belt tensioners. message on the multi-information way and will not get closed in the
display (see page 77 ). door.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
instrument panel and a beeper to The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
remind you to fasten your seat belt. your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some
If you turn the ignition to ON (II) tension on the belt. During a collision
before fastening your seat belt, the To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
beeper will sound and the indicator plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
will flash. If you do not fasten your belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
seat belt before the beeper stops, the latched (see page 17 for how to
indicator will stop flashing but properly position the belt).
remain on.
CONTINUED
21
The seat belts in all positions except Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to
the driver’s have an additional activate primarily in frontal collisions,
locking mechanism that must be and they should activate in any
activated to secure a child seat (see collision severe enough to cause
page 47 ). front-airbag inflation.
If the shoulder part of the belt is The tensioners can also be activated
pulled all the way out, the locking during a collision in which the front
mechanism will activate. The belt airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
will retract, but it will not allow the airbags would not be needed, but the
passenger to move freely. additional restraint could be helpful.
To deactivate the locking When the tensioners are activated,

mechanism, unlatch the buckle and the seat belts will remain tight until
let the seat belt fully retract. To For added protection, the front seat they are unbuckled in the normal
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only belts are equipped with automatic manner.
as far as needed. seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
22
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

Pull each belt out fully and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. Any belt that anchors for damage and replace
is not in good condition or working them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
properly will not provide good belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
protection and should be replaced as crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
soon as possible.
For information on how to clean your
Acura provides a lifetime warranty seat belts, see page 321 .
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Acura Warranty Information
booklet for details.
23
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (9) (2)

(1) (11)
(8)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Airbag

(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit (10) (4)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags (3) (7)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (5) (6)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10)
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors (4)
24
Your airbag system includes:

(13) Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s

(12) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ).
(3)
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling
(12) above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(14) CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(12) Side Impact Sensor (Second) 32 ).
(13) Rear Safing Sensor
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
CONTINUED
25
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 22 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the
seat. These automatically turn off passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a the passenger’s front airbag if turned off (see page 33 ).
moderate to severe front impact or they detect an infant or small child
side impact. may be in the seat (see page 29 ). An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
Sensors that can detect whether a A sophisticated electronic system front airbag has been turned off
child is in the passenger’s side that continually monitors and (see page 33 ).
airbag path and automatically turn records information about the
the airbag off (see page 29 ). sensors, the control unit, the Emergency backup power in case
airbag activators, the seat belt your vehicle’s electrical system is
A driver’s seat position sensor that tensioners, and driver and front disconnected in a crash.
monitors the distance of the seat passenger seat belt use when the
from the front airbag. If the seat is ignition is in ON (II).
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page An indicator on the instrument
29 ). panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 32 ).
26
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 29 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
27
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of belt.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time It the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
28
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly: DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION PASSENGER’S
Occupants must sit upright and SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
wear their seat belts properly. SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. If the sensors detect
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will an infant or small child may be in the
inflate with less force, regardless of seat, the system will automatically
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
put their feet under the front seats.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
29
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
33 ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
If there is no passenger in the front items in the seat-back pocket.
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator Also, make sure the floor mat behind
will not come on. the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
To ensure that the passenger’s 322 ). If it is not, the mat may
advanced front airbag system will interfere with the proper operation
work properly, do not do anything of the sensors and operation of the
that would increase or decrease the seat. If you ever have a moderate to
weight on the front passenger’s seat. severe side impact, the sensors will
This includes: detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
A rear passenger pushing or either the driver’s or the passenger’s
pulling on the back of the side airbag.
passenger’s seat.
30
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the To reduce the risk of injury from an on (see page 33 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s inflating side airbag, your vehicle has passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there an automatic cutoff system for the passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. passenger’s side airbag. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Acura does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, this system
should wear their seat belts and sit is designed to shut off the side There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. airbag if a child leans into the side the moment the passenger moves
airbag’s path. into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
The side airbag may also shut off if a on or goes off.
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans A front seat passenger should not
sideways into the airbag’s use a cushion or other object as a
deployment path. backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants When you turn the ignition to ON
should wear their seat belts and sit (II), this indicator will come on
upright and well back in their seats. briefly then go out. This tells you the
system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any

other time, or does not come on at all,
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration If the SRS indicator does not come
and signal the control unit to on after you turn the ignition to
instantly inflate the side curtain ON (II).
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
32
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the Indicator Works Indicator Works
multi-information display (see page U.S. Canada
76 ). This indicator alerts

you that the
If you see any of these indications, passenger’s side airbag has been
the airbags and seat belt tensioners automatically shut off. It does not
U.S. Canada
may not work properly when you mean there is a problem with your
need them. side airbags.
When you turn the ignition to ON

(II), the indicator should come on
Ignoring the SRS indicator can briefly and go out (see page 61 ). If it
result in serious injury or death does not come on, stays on, or comes PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
if the airbag systems or on while driving without a passenger
tensioners do not work properly. in the front seat, you will also see a This indicator alerts you that the
‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF passenger’s front airbag has been
Have your vehicle checked by a SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- shut off because weight sensors
dealer as soon as possible if information display. Have the system detect an infant or small child may
the SRS indicator alerts you to checked (see page 77 ). be in the front passenger’s seat. It
a possible problem. does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
33
If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
come on. parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
If the indicator comes on with no vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
problem with the advanced airbag that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
system. Have the vehicle checked by replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
your dealer as soon as possible. unit and other related parts. If a should inspect the driver’s seat
front airbag inflates, the seat belt position sensor and the front
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator tensioners must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors to
may also come on and off repeatedly make sure they are operating
if total weight on the seat is near the Do not try to remove or replace properly.
airbag cutoff threshold. any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
If this happens, have the passenger knowledgeable body shop.
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
34
Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-

Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

protection. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front

seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
35
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 50 − 53 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 41 − 49 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
36
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
age 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system, which
restrained in a back seat. Some can automatically turn the Larger Children
states have laws restricting where passenger’s front airbag off (see Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. page 29 ), please follow the seats are also at risk of being injured
guidelines below. or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in back are less front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt. For more information, see page
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back 50 .
in the back. of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
CONTINUED
37
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
38
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put contact, we strongly recommend
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front that another adult ride with the

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the child in a back seat. The back seat
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires is far safer for a child than the
front: attention. front.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 50 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 119 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 18 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
17 ).
39
Additional Safety Precautions Use childproof door locks to Lock all doors and the trunk when
Never hold an infant or child on prevent children from opening the your vehicle is not in use. Children
your lap. If you are not wearing a doors. This can prevent children who play in vehicles can
seat belt in crash, you could be from accidentally falling out (see accidentally get trapped inside.
thrown forward and crush the page 118 ). Teach your children not to play in
child against the dashboard or a or around vehicles. Know how to
seat-back. If you are wearing a Do not leave children alone in a operate the emergency trunk
seat belt, the child can be torn vehicle. Leaving children without opener and decide if your children
from your arms and be seriously adult supervision is illegal in most should be shown how to use this
hurt or killed. states and Canadian provinces, feature (see page 118 ).
and can be very hazardous.
Never put a seat belt over yourself Keep vehicle keys and remote
and a child. During a crash, the For example, infants and small transmitters out of the reach of
belt could press deep into the child children left in a vehicle on a hot children. Even very young
and cause serious or fatal injuries. day can die from heatstroke. A children learn how to unlock
child left alone with the key in the vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
Never let two children use the ignition can accidentally set the switch, and open the trunk, which
same seat belt. If they do, they vehicle in motion, possibly injuring can lead to accidental injury or
could be very seriously injured in a themselves or others. death.
crash.
40
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving the seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking the
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
41
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
recommend that you install the child child use the child seat as long as
seat directly behind the front possible, until the child reaches the
passenger’s seat, move the seat as weight or height limit for the seat.
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Even with advanced front airbags,

in the front seat can result in which can automatically turn the
serious injury or death during a passenger’s front airbag off (see
collision. page 29 ), a back seat is the safest
Child Seat Type place for a small child.
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least 1 year old, and
seat in the back seat, not the who fits within the child seat maker’s
front. weight and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
42
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. Children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 45 ).
CONTINUED
43
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat, should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position, or positions, secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Make sure the child is properly
Tethers for Children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side to side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
44
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with LOWER
LATCH. ANCHORS REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON
The location of each lower anchor is To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Push the rear head restraint tilt
indicated by a small button above the seat: button on the ceiling console to
anchor point. pivot the head restraints down.
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
45
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE
4. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats 7. Attach the tether strap hook to the
seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as tether anchor, then tighten the
lower anchors according to the shown above. strap as instructed by the child
child seat maker’s instructions. seat maker.
5. Whatever type you have, follow
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat maker’s instructions 8. Push and pull the child seat
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit. forward and from side to side to
shown above. verify that it is secure.
6. After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page 47 ), route the tether
strap over the head restraint.
46
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
47
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side to side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
48
Installing a Child Seat with a Using the Tether Anchor 2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
Tether the tether strap hook to the
TETHER STRAP anchor, making sure the strap is
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS HOOK not twisted.

3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
COVER ANCHOR
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
A child seat with a tether can be seat with the lap/shoulder belt
installed in any seating position in (see page 47 ), pivot the head
the back seat, using one of the restraint down (see page 120 ) and
anchorage points shown above. route the tether strap over the
head restraint.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
49
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
50
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or
between the child’s neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as safety standards (see page 43 ) and

possible, touching the child’s that you follow the booster seat
thighs? maker’s instructions.
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster seat
seated like this for the whole trip? must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far to the rear as possible,
If you answer yes to all these and be sure the child is wearing the
questions, the child is ready to wear seat belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward- seat until the tops of their ears are
facing child seat should ride in a even with the top of the vehicle’s or
back seat and use a booster seat booster’s seat-back. A child of this
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them height should be tall enough to use
properly without the booster. the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Some states also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
51
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see page 50 ). If the seat most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause belt does not fit properly, with or
serious injuries to a child who is without the child sitting on a booster Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, seat, the child should not sit in front. against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out near the floor.
of position. Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any be able to follow the rules, including properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
path of a deploying side airbag, the belt properly throughout a ride. Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
52
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
53
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly. you. set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
54
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
Canadian models
CONTINUED
55
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
56
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 58 Childproof Door Locks ................. 118
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Seats ................................................ 119
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 60 Mirrors ............................................ 122
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 68 Driving Position Memory
controls are within easy reach. Temperature Gauge .................... 68 System......................................... 124
Fuel Gauge ................................... 68 Keyless Access System................. 127

Multi-Information Display .............. 69 Seat Heaters ................................... 142
Controls Near the Steering Seat Heaters and Seat
Wheel .......................................... 101 Ventilation .................................. 143
Windshield Wipers and Power Windows ............................. 145
Washers ...................................... 102 Moonroof ........................................ 147
Turn Signal .................................... 104 Parking Brake ................................ 151
Headlights ..................................... 104 Interior Convenience Items .......... 152
Fog Lights ..................................... 106 Glove Box ................................... 153
Adaptive Front Lighting System Beverage Holders ...................... 154
(AFS) .......................................... 107 Console Compartment .............. 155
Hazard Warning Button ................ 109 Sun Visors ................................... 156
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 109 Accessory Power Sockets......... 156
Rear Window Defogger ................ 110 Rear Ashtrays ............................ 157
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 111 Front Door Pockets ................... 157
Keys and Locks.............................. 113 Power Rear Sunshade ............... 158
Immobilizer System....................... 114 Integrated Sunshades ............... 159
Ignition Switch ............................... 115 Interior Lights ................................ 160
Door Locks ..................................... 116
Trunk............................................... 117
Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 118
57
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING CONSOLE＊ MIRROR CONTROL

INDICATORS (P.60) AUTO BUTTON
GAUGES (P.68) (P.122)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM CLIMATE CONTROL
(P.124) SYSTEM
(P.162)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.116) (P.171)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.145) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.265)
ACCESSORY POWER
＊ SOCKETS
OnStar BUTTONS (P.217) (P.156)
HomeLink BUTTONS (P.204)
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.148)
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON (P.158)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
TILT BUTTON (P.120) TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
(P.117) HOOD RELEASE LEVER
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE (P.251)
BUTTON
(P.249)
58
Instrument Panel
MESSAGE INDICATOR
KEYLESS ACCESS (P.66) VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.63, 281)
(P.66) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.64)
SECURITY VSA
CHARGING SYSTEM SYSTEM ACTIVATION ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR (AFS) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67, 107)
(P.60, 348) (P.63, 281)

(P.67)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62) (P.62, 275)
FOG LIGHT SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR INDICATOR＊ (P.33, 61)
(P.64) ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED
POWER STEERING
SYSTEM (ECPS)
INDICATOR
(P.66)
LOW OIL
PRESSURE PARKING BRAKE AND
INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM
(P.60, 348) INDICATOR＊ (P.61, 350)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR (P.64)
LAMP (P.60, 349) INDICATOR (P.21, 60)
SH-AWD INDICATOR LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.65, 272) (P.64) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.32, 61)
MULTI-INFORMATION LOW TIRE PRESSURE
DISPLAY (P.69) INDICATOR IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(P.65, 277) INDICATOR (P.62)
＊ : The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
59
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder Low Oil Pressure
indicators to give you important Indicator Indicator
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you The engine can be severely damaged
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It if this indicator flashes or stays on
reminds you and your passengers to when the engine is running, or if a
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’
sounds if you have not fastened your message is on the multi-information
seat belt. display. For more information, see
page 348 .
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) before fastening your belt, the Charging System
beeper sounds and the indicator Indicator
flashes. If you do not fasten your If this indicator comes on when the
seat belt before the beeper stops, the engine is running, the battery is not
indicator stops flashing but remains being charged, and you will also see
on. a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
If you continue driving without display. For more information, see
fastening your seat belt, the beeper page 348 .
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals, and you Malfunction Indicator
will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT Lamp
BELT’’ message on the multi- You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
information display (see page 77 ). EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 349 .
60
U.S. Canada system. You will also see a U.S. Canada

‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
Parking Brake and Brake System message on the multi-information Side Airbag Off Indicator
Indicator display (see page 76 ). For more This indicator comes on when you
This indicator has two functions: information, see page 350 . turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If

it comes on at any other time, it
1. It comes on when you turn the Supplemental Restraint indicates that the passenger’s side
ignition switch to ON (II). It is a System Indicator airbag has automatically shut off.
reminder to check the parking This indicator comes on briefly when You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
brake. Driving with the parking you turn the ignition switch to ON SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
brake not fully released can (II). If it comes on at any other time, multi-information display (see page
damage the rear brakes, axles, and it indicates a potential problem with 77 ). For more information, see
tires. your front airbags. This indicator will page 33 .
If you drive without releasing the also alert you to a potential problem
parking brake, a chime will sound, with your side airbags, passenger’s
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE side airbag automatic cutoff system,
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on automatic seat belt tensioners, or
the multi-information display (see side curtain airbags. You will also see
page 76 ). a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’
2. If it stays on after you have fully display (see page 76 ). For more
released the parking brake while information, see page 32 .
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
61
Lights On Indicator Immobilizer System Anti-lock Brake System

Indicator (ABS) Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on for a few This indicator normally comes on for
exterior lights are on. It comes on seconds when you turn the ignition a few seconds when you turn the
when the light switch is in either the switch to ON (II). It will then go off ignition switch to ON (II), and when
or position. This indicator if you have a properly-coded remote. the ignition switch is turned to
will also come on when the light If it is not a properly-coded remote, START (III). If this indicator comes
switch is in AUTO and the lights the indicator will blink and the on at any other time, there is a
turn on automatically. If you turn the engine will not start (see page 114 ). problem in the ABS. If this happens,
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) take the vehicle to your dealer to
or LOCK (0) without turning off the If you use the remote, this indicator have it checked. With this indicator
light switch, this indicator will blinks several times when you turn on, your vehicle still has normal
remain on. A reminder chime will the ignition switch from braking ability but no anti-lock
also sound when you open the driver’s ACCESSORY (I) to LOCK (0). function. You will also see a
door. ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ message
If you use the built-in key, this on the multi-information display (see
indicator blinks several times when page 76 ). For more information, see
you turn the ignition switch from ON page 275 .
(II) to ACCESSORY (I).
62
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and

(VSA) System Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions. Indicators
a few seconds when you turn the The left or right turn signal indicator
ignition switch to ON (II). 1. It comes on as a reminder that you blinks when you signal a lane change
have turned off the vehicle or turn. If the indicator does not

If it comes on and stays on at any stability assist (VSA) system. blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
other time, or it does not come on means one of the turn signal bulbs is
when you turn the ignition switch to 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see burned out (see page 316 ). Replace
ON (II), there is a problem with the page 281 ). the bulb as soon as possible, since
VSA system. You will also see a other drivers cannot see that you are
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message 3. It comes on along with the VSA signaling.
on the multi-information display (see system indicator if there is a
page 76 ). Take your vehicle to a problem with the VSA system. When you press the hazard warning
dealer to have it checked. Without You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA button, both turn signals blink. All
VSA, your vehicle still has normal SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- turn signals on the outside of the
driving ability, but will not have VSA information display (see page 76 ). vehicle should flash.
traction and stability enhancement.
For more information, see page 281 . This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). For more
information, see page 281 .
63
Fog Light Indicator High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on with the
turn on the fog lights. For more high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 106 . information, see page 104 .
Cruise Main Indicator This indicator also comes on with

reduced brightness when the
This indicator comes on when you daytime running lights (DRL) are on
turn on the cruise control system by (see page 106 ).
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 201 ).
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It

comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 77 ).
64
SH-AWD Indicator Pull to the side of the road when it is If this happens, pull to the side of the
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine road when it is safe, check which tire
This indicator normally comes on for idle until the indicator goes out. has lost the pressure on the multi-
a few seconds when you turn the information display, and determine
ignition switch to ON (II). If this the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
indicator comes on at any other time, replace the flat tire with the compact

there is a problem in the SH-AWD Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD spare (see page 336 ), and have the
system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK indicator blinking may cause serious flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
SH-AWD SYSTEM’’ message on the damage to the system. If two or more tires are underinflated,
multi-information display (see page call a professional towing service.
76 ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to Low Tire Pressure For more information, see page 360 .
have it checked. For more Indicator
information, see page 272 . This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
If the indicator blinks while driving, ignition switch to ON (II).
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine If it comes on while driving, it
idle until the indicator goes out. indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
If it comes on while driving, it pressure.
indicates the differential
temperature is too high. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF PRESSURE’’ message on the multi-
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the information display (see page 77 ).
multi-information display (see page
76 ).
65
Electronically Controlled Keyless Access System Message Indicator

Power Steering System Indicator
(ECPS) Indicator This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on when there
This indicator normally comes on a few seconds when you turn the is a system message in the multi-
when you turn the ignition to ON (II) ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes information display. Press the INFO
and goes off after the engine starts. on at any other time, it indicates that button on the steering wheel (see
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the system. page 69 ) to see the message (see
there is a problem with the power You will also see a ‘‘CHECK page 76 ).
steering system. You will also see a KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM’’
‘‘CHECK POWER STEERING message on the multi-information Most of the time, this indicator
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- display (see page 77 ). For more comes on along with other indicators
information display (see page 76 ). If information, see page 140 . in the instrument panel such as the
this happens, stop the vehicle in a seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
safe place, and turn off the engine. indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine, and watch this indicator. If it
does not go off, or comes back on
again while driving, take the vehicle
to your dealer to have it checked.
With the indicator on, the ECPS is
turned off, which could make the
vehicle harder to steer.
The indicator comes on when you
gun the engine while the vehicle is
not moving. To turn the indicator off,
restart the engine.
66
Adaptive Front Lighting Security System Indicator

(AFS) System Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).

It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS).
This indicator blinks when there is a

problem with the AFS system; you
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ADAPTIVE SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information This indicator comes on when the
display (see page 76 ). If this security system is set. For more
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe information, see page 200 .
place, turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), and
restart the engine. If the indicator
does not go off or blinks again, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. For more information, see
page 107 .
67
Gauges
Fuel Gauge
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown. FUEL GAUGE
Temperature Gauge upper end of the white section of the

This shows the temperature of the gauge. If it reaches the red (hot)
engine’s coolant. During normal mark, pull safely to the side of the
operation, the pointer should rise road. For more information, see page
from the bottom white mark to about 345 .
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
68
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the

instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help INFO (▲/▼)
you operate your vehicle more BUTTONS

comfortably. U.S. CANADA
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving. SEL
RESET
BUTTON
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the You can change the display and
multi-information display. When you customize your vehicle control
turn the ignition switch from ON (II) settings by pressing the SEL/RESET
position to ACCESSORY (I) position, or INFO buttons on the right side of
a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is shown on the steering wheel.
the display.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the lower part of the
multi-information display changes as
shown in the illustration, each time
you press the SEL/RESET button.
69
Odometer Trip Meter When you reset Trip A, average fuel

economy A is reset at the same time.
ODOMETER When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set

Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 84 ).
TRIP METER
The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
federal law and Canadian provincial independently, so you can keep track
regulations to disconnect, reset, or of two different distances.
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or To reset a trip meter, display it, then
kilometers indicated. press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
70
Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the Engine Oil Life

front bumper. The temperature
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
U.S. surrounding traffic. This can cause

an incorrect temperature reading
when your speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
CANADA your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed. ENGINE OIL LIFE
This shows the outside Fahrenheit In certain weather conditions, This shows the remaining life of the
temperature in U.S. models, and temperature readings near freezing engine oil. It shows 100% after the
Centigrade temperature in Canadian (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is engine oil is replaced and the display
models. forming on the road surface. is reset. The engine oil life is
You can adjust the outside calculated based on engine operating
temperature display (see page 83 ). conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page 291 .
71

(II) position, the upper part of the
display changes, as shown in the
illustration, each time you press the
▼ button. If you press the ▲ button, If ON
U.S. CANADA
the display returns to the previous
message.
Press ▼ button
Press button
72
Trip Computer Range is the estimated distance you

Along with the trip meter, the trip can travel on the fuel remaining in
computer calculates these values: the tank. This distance is estimated
from the fuel economy you received
Instant Fuel Economy over the last several miles, so it will
Range vary with changes in speed, traffic,

Elapsed Time etc.
Average Vehicle Speed
Average Fuel Economy When you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, ELAPSED
When Trip A is reset, average fuel TIME is reset.
economy A is reset at the same time.
When Trip B is reset, average fuel
economy B is reset at the same time.
73
SH-AWD Torque Distribution Tire Pressure Monitor When the tire pressure monitor is
Monitor shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
U.S. in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 277 .
Canada
This monitor shows how much

torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page 272 .
74
HandsFreeLink TM Maintenance Messages Have your dealer do the indicated

maintenance as soon as you see this
message, and have them reset the
display after completing the service.
If you do not perform the indicated

maintenance or do not reset the
display, the message changes to
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
engine oil life becomes 0 percent.
These messages appear on the multi-

information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
You can receive or make phone calls When the engine oil life reaches 15
from your cell phone through your percent, the display shows For details on engine oil life and
Acura’s HandsFreeLink (HFL) ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ and the maintenance messages, refer to page
system without touching your cell code for the maintenance items to be 291 .
phone. performed.
To use the system, your cell phone Also refer to page 290 for important
and the HFL system must be linked. When the engine oil life reaches 5 maintenance safety precautions.
Not all cell phones are compatible percent, the display shows
with this system. Refer to page ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ along with
230 for instructions on how to link the same maintenance items.
your cell phone to the HFL and how
to receive or make phone calls.
75
Message Display
When a problem is detected with See page
your vehicle, a message will be 62, 275
See page
shown on the multi-information
61, 350
display. See page
If this happens, refer to the 63, 281
applicable pages of this owner’s
manual, and follow the instructions. See page See page
350 67, 107
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the See page See page
messages every 5 seconds. 60, 348 66
The message is shown until you
push the INFO button. See page
To see the message again, press the 60, 349
See page
INFO button, 5 seconds after the
65, 272
display disappears. See page
60, 348
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display. See page See page
264 265
See page See page

347 32, 61
76
See page
280
See page
106
See page
279

U.S. See page
65, 279
See page
Canada 33, 61
See page
13
See page See page

139 60
See page See page

138 250
See page See page

139 64
See page See page

310 291
77
Customized Settings CUSTOMIZE GROUP CUSTOMIZE MENU CUSTOMIZE SET UP DEFAULT

With the multi-information display METER SETUP LANGUAGE See page ENGLISH ENGLISH
and the ▲, ▼, and SEL/RESET SELECTION 83 FRENCH
buttons on the right side of the SPANISH
steering wheel, you can change ADJUST OUTSIDE See page −5°F∼＋5°F ±0°F
several vehicle control settings to TEMP. DISPLAY 83 −3°C∼＋3°C ±0°C
your preference (see page 81 ). TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A See page ON OFF
RESET with REFUEL 84 OFF
To change the settings, the ignition EXIT
switch must be in the ON (II) POSITION SETUP MEMORY POSITION See page ON ON
position. LINK 86 OFF
AUTO TILT & See page ON ON
Here are the settings you can TELESCOPIC 86 OFF
change: EXIT
KEYLESS ACCESS DOOR UNLOCK MODE See page DRIVER DOOR ONLY DRIVER
SETUP 89 ALL DOORS DOOR ONLY
KEYLESS ACCESS See page ON ON
LIGHT FLASH 89 OFF
KEYLESS ACCESS See page ON ON
BEEP 90 OFF
EXIT
LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT See page 60 SEC 30 SEC
DIMMING TIME 92 30 SEC
15 SEC
HEADLIGHT AUTO See page 60 SEC 15 SEC
OFF TIMER 92 30 SEC
78
CUSTOMIZE GROUP CUSTOMIZE MENU CUSTOMIZE SET UP DEFAULT If you turn the ignition switch to
LIGHTING SETUP HEADLIGHT AUTO See page 15 SEC 15 SEC ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), or
OFF TIMER 92 0 SEC move the shift lever out of Park, the
AUTO LIGHT See page MAX MID display will change to the normal
SENSITIVITY 93 HIGH screen.
MID

LOW To have the driver’s ID detected,
MIN make sure your remote is linked to
EXIT the system (see Memory Position
DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR LOCK See page SHIFT FROM P WITH VEH Link on page 86 ). Then use your
SETUP 95 WITH VEH SPD SPD remote to unlock the doors (see
OFF Keyless Access Setup on page 88 ).
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK See page SHIFT TO P SHIFT TO
96 IGN OFF P When the ignition switch is in the
OFF ON (II) position, the multi-
DOOR LOCK MODE See page DRIVER DOOR DRIVER information display shows the driver’s
97 ALL DOORS DOOR ID.
KEYLESS LOCK See page ON ON You cannot customize the setting;
ACKNOWLEDGMENT 97 OFF When the keyless memory
SECURITY RELOCK See page 90 SEC 30 SEC settings are off (see page 167 ).
TIMER 98 60 SEC When you disconnect the vehicle
30 SEC battery, and then do not unlock
EXIT the door.
WIPER SETUP WIPER ACTION See page INTERMITTENT WITH VEH When the multi-information
100 WITH VEH SPD SPD display does not show the driver’s
EXIT ID.
EXIT
79
Setting to Default Setting Incomplete
Press the SET/RESET buton.
If you want the settings as they were Select SET, and press the SEL/ If the message shown above appears
when the vehicle left the factory, RESET button. on the multi-information display
press the INFO button for more than The confirmation screen is shown while you are customizing the
3 seconds then release it. The for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE settings, this message lets you know
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen will be ENTRY screen appears. the setting has not changed.
shown. If you select EXIT and press the
Select DEFAULT ALL, and press SEL/RESET button, the
the SEL/RESET button. CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen
appears again.
80
Selecting a Customize Group

(II) position, press the INFO button TO METER
for more than 3 seconds, then SET UP
see page 82
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
screen appears on the multi-

information display. TO POSITION
Select CHG SETTING, and press the SET UP
see page 85
SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the display changes as TO KEYLESS
shown in the illustration. Select ACCESS SET UP
see page 88
which of these customize groups you
want to change:
TO LIGHTING
METER SET UP SET UP
see page 91
POSITION SET UP
KEYLESS ACCESS SET UP
LIGHTING SET UP TO DOOR/
DOOR/WINDOW SET UP WINDOW SET UP
see page 94
WIPER SET UP
If you select EXIT and press the TO WIPER

SEL/RESET button, the SET UP
Press the ▲ or ▼ button. see page 99
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is Press the SEL/RESET button.
shown again.
81
Meter Setup
(II) position, press the INFO button
for more than 3 seconds, then
information display.
Select CHG SETTING, and press the
SEL/RESET button.
Select METER SET UP, and press
the SEL/RESET button.
▼) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration.
Here are the settings you can

customize in this mode:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET
with REFUEL
If you select EXIT by pressing the
SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
shown again.
82
Language Selection To exit this mode without changing Adjust Outside Temp. Display
the current settings, select EXIT,
and press the SEL/RESET button.

You can select the language shown You can adjust the outside
on the multi-information display to temperature shown on the multi-
English, French, or Spanish. information display in the range of
Select the desired language by −5°F (−3°C) to 5°F (3°C).
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and Adjust the temperature by pressing
enter your selection by pressing the the ▲ or ▼ button, and enter your
SEL/RESET button. selection by pressing the SEL/
The confirmation screen is shown RESET button.
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE The confirmation screen is shown
ENTRY screen returns. for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
ENTRY screen returns.
CONTINUED
83
Trip A & AVG. FUEL A Reset With To exit this mode without changing
Refuel the current settings, select EXIT,
You can set whether or not Trip A

and average fuel economy A are
reset when you refuel your vehicle.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the ▲
or ▼ button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
The confirmation screen is shown
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
84
Position Setup

SEL/RESET button.
Select POSITION SET UP, and press



MEMORY POSITION LINK
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC
If you select EXIT by pressing the Press the ▲ or ▼ button.

SEL/RESET button, the Press the SEL/RESET button.
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY screen is
shown again. CONTINUED
85
Memory Position Link Select ON or OFF by pressing the ▲ Auto Tilt & Telescopic
RESET button.

To exit this mode without changing

When you unlock the doors by When you turn the ignition switch to
pressing the button on the remote or LOCK (0) and release it, or remove
by grabbing the driver’s door handle the built-in key from the ignition
while carrying the remote, the switch, the steering wheel
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is automatically moves fully in and up.
recognized, and the driver’s seat, the You can turn this feature on or off.
steering wheel, and the outside
mirror positions move to their
memorized positions.
You can turn this feature on or off.
86
Select ON or OFF by pressing the ▲

RESET button.


87
KEYLESS ACCESS Setup

SEL/RESET button.
Select KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP,

DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
If you select EXIT and press the

SEL/RESET button, the Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is Press the SEL/RESET button.
shown again.
88
Door Unlock Mode The confirmation screen is shown Keyless Access Light Flash


You can select whether the driver’s When you unlock the doors by
door unlocks or all the doors unlock grabbing the driver’s door handle
when you unlock the doors by while carrying the remote, some
grabbing the driver’s door handle exterior lights will blink twice.
while carrying the remote. When you lock the doors touching
Select the desired mode by pressing the door lock sensor while carrying
the ▲ or ▼ button, and enter your the remote, some exterior lights will
selection by pressing the SEL/ blink once.
RESET button. You can turn this feature on or off.
CONTINUED
89
Select ON or OFF by pressing the ▲ Keyless Access Beep Select ON or OFF by pressing the ▲
or ▼ button, and enter your or ▼ button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/ selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button. RESET button.
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE The confirmation screen is shown
ENTRY screen returns. for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
the current settings, select EXIT, To exit this mode without changing
and press the SEL/RESET button. the current settings, select EXIT,
If you unlock the doors by grabbing

the driver’s door handle while
carrying the remote, the beeper
sounds twice. When you lock the
doors, the beeper sounds once.
You can turn this feature on or off.
90
Lighting Setup

SEL/RESET button.
Select LIGHTING SETUP, and press
Each time you press the ▲ or ▼
button, the screen changes as shown
in the illustration.

INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
If you select EXIT and press the Press the ▲ or ▼ button.

SEL/RESET button, the Press the SEL/RESET button.
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
shown again. CONTINUED
91
Interior Light Dimming Time To exit this mode without changing Headlight Auto Off Timer
The interior lights fade out when you The headlights, parking lights, side
close all doors (see page 160 ). Select marker lights, taillights, and license
how long it takes for the interior plate light turn off after the selected
lights to fade out (in seconds) from time when you close the driver’s
60 SEC, 30 SEC, or 15 SEC by door and take the remote with you.
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and
enter your selection by pressing the Select how long it takes for the
SEL/RESET button. exterior lights to turn off (in
seconds) from 60 SEC, 30 SEC, 15
The confirmation screen is shown SEC, or 0 SEC, by pressing the ▲ or
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE ▼ button, and enter your selection
ENTRY screen returns. by pressing the SEL/RESET button.
92
The confirmation screen is shown Auto Light Sensitivity somewhat bright.

for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE MID −
ENTRY screen returns. The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
To exit this mode without changing LOW −
the current settings, select EXIT, The headlights come on when it is

and press the SEL/RESET button. somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
Select from the five levels of

sensitivity by pressing the ▲ or ▼
button, and enter your selection by
The headlights automatically come pressing the SEL/RESET button.
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and ambient light The confirmation screen is shown
reaches a customizable level. for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
You can select the auto light ENTRY screen returns.
sensitivity.
MAX − the current settings, select EXIT,
The headlights come on when it is and press the SEL/RESET button.
bright.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
93
Door/Window Setup Select DOOR/WINDOW SET UP, If you select EXIT and press the
With the ignition switch in the ON and press the SEL/RESET button. SEL/RESET button, the
(II) position, press the INFO button Each time you press the INFO (▲/ CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is
for more than 3 seconds, then ▼) button, the display changes as shown again.
release it. The CUSTOMIZE ENTRY shown in the illustration.
screen appears on the multi- Here are the settings you can
information display. customize in this mode:
Select CHG SETTING, and press the AUTO DOOR LOCK
SEL/RESET button. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
94
Auto Door Lock

You can select from three possible
settings for auto door lock:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD −

The doors lock when the vehicle
Press the ▲ or ▼ button. speed reaches about 10 mph (about
Press the SEL/RESET button. 15 km/h).
CONTINUED
95
OFF − Auto Door Unlock IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all
The auto door lock is deactivated all doors, depending on your selection
the time. in DOOR LOCK MODE (see page
97 ), unlock when you turn the
Select the desired condition by ignition switch to LOCK (0).
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and
enter your selection by pressing the OFF − The auto door unlock is
SEL/RESET button. deactivated all the time.
The confirmation screen is shown Select the desired setting by

for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and
ENTRY screen returns. enter your selection by pressing the
SEL/RESET button.
the current settings, select EXIT, You can select from three possible The confirmation screen is shown
and press the SEL/RESET button. settings for auto door unlock: for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on your To exit this mode without changing
selection in DOOR LOCK MODE the current settings, select EXIT,
(see page 97 ), unlock whenever and press the SEL/RESET button.
you move the shift lever to Park.
96
Door Lock Mode To exit this mode without changing Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

If you unlock the doors by pressing When you press the LOCK button
the button on the remote, you can on the remote a second time within 5
select whether the driver’s door seconds after you lock the doors, the
unlocks or all the doors unlock. hood, and the trunk with the remote,
Select the desired mode by pressing a beeper will sound and the exterior
the ▲ or ▼ button, and enter your lights will blink once to verify that
selection by pressing the SEL/ the doors are locked and the security
RESET button. system is ready.
CONTINUED
97
When you press the UNLOCK Security Relock Timer Select the desired time by pressing
button on the remote a second time the ▲ or ▼ button and, enter your
within 5 seconds after you unlock selection by pressing the SEL/
the doors with the remote, the RESET button.
beeper will sound twice and the
exterior lights will blink twice to The confirmation screen is shown
verify that the doors are unlocked for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE
and the security system is turned off. ENTRY screen returns.
If you do not want the beeper to To exit this mode without changing
sound and the exterior lights to blink, the current settings, select EXIT,
select OFF by pressing the ▲ or ▼ and press the SEL/RESET button.
button, and enter your selection by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
If you unlock the doors by pressing
The confirmation screen is shown the button on the remote or
for 2 seconds, then the CUSTOMIZE grabbing the driver’s door handle
ENTRY screen returns. while carrying the remote, but do not
open any of the doors within 30
To exit this mode without changing seconds, the doors automatically
the current settings, select EXIT, relock and the security system sets.
and press the SEL/RESET button. You can select this relock time to be
90, 60, or 30 seconds.
98
Wiper Setup

SEL/RESET button.
Select WIPER SET UP, and press


You can customize the WIPER

ACTION in this mode.
If you select EXIT and press the

SEL/RESET button, the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP screen is Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.
shown again.
CONTINUED
99
Wiper Action Select the desired mode by pressing

the ▲ or ▼ button, and enter your
RESET button.


You can select from two settings

when the wiper switch is in the INT
position.
WITH VEH SPD −

The wiper intermittent operation
changes with vehicle speed.
INTERMITTENT −
The wiper intermittent operation
varies according to the time selected
on the wiper lever.
100
INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD HAZARD WARNING

PANEL BRIGHTNESS WIPER/WASHER BUTTON
(P.109) (P.102) (P.109)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.267)
HEADLIGHTS/ PASSENGER AIRBAG

TURN SIGNAL/FOG OFF INDICATOR
LIGHTS (P.33)
(P.104)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.110) /
HEATED MIRROR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) BUTTON (P.123)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.282) CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.201)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SEAT HEATER

SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH SWITCHES
(P.108) (P.142) /
SEAT HEATER AND
HANDSFREELINKTM HORN SEAT VENTILATION
MIRROR CONTROLS BUTTONS BUTTONS＊1
(P.123) (P.231) (P.143)
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.111) AUDIO CONTROLS (P.198) BUTTONS
＊2
MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS (P.69)
＊1 : Canadian models only

＊2 : Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
101
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull back
and hold the wiper control lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run
INT − The length of the wipe at low speed, then complete one
interval is varied automatically more sweep after you release the
according to vehicle speed. lever.
If you turn it to the shortest delay, Headlight Washers

1. MIST the wipers change to low speed (On Canadian models)
2. OFF operation when the vehicle speed When the switch on the left lever is
3. INT − Intermittent exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). turned to the AUTO or ‘‘ ’’
4. LO − Low speed position, the headlight washers also
5. HI − High speed To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’ work while the lever is held.
6. Windshield Washers setting, see page 100 .
The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.
102
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Wiper Arm Positions WIPER ARMS WIPER ARMS

The windshield wiper arms have two
parked positions: winter and summer.
In the winter position, the arms sit
slightly above the edge of the hood.
This reduces the possibility of

damage to the wiper arms or
windshield wiper motor by a build-up
of snow and ice.
HOLDING HOLDING
Winter position LOCATIONS Summer position LOCATIONS
Adjust the wiper arms to the winter To return to the summer position,
position by holding both arms as push the same area of both arms the
shown in the illustration at the same other direction.
time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the
windshield, until it locks in the
higher position.
A heavy build-up of snow or ice on

the wiper arms will cause them to
automatically park in the winter
position.
103
Turn Signal, Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the When the light switch is in the
left lever to signal a left turn and up ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane lights on indicator comes on as a
change, push lightly on the lever and reminder. This indicator stays on if
hold it. The lever will return to you leave the light switch on and
center when you release it or turn the ignition switch to the
complete a turn. ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
Headlights − The rotating switch
on the left lever controls the lights. High Beams − To switch from low
Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’ beams to high beams, push the left
position turns on the parking lights, lever forward until you hear a click.
taillights, instrument panel lights, The blue high beam indicator will
1. Turn signal side-marker lights, and rear license come on (see page 64 ). Pull it back
2. Off plate lights. to return to low beams. To flash the
3. Parking and indicator lights high beams, pull the lever back
4. AUTO Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lightly, then release it. The high
5. Headlights on position turns on the headlights. If beams stay on as long as you hold
6. High beams you leave the lights on with the the lever back.
7. Flash high beams ignition switch released after turned
8. Fog lights off to the LOCK (0) position or when
9. Fog lights on the built-in key is removed from the
ignition switch, you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
104
Headlights
AUTO − The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting LIGHT
feature turns on the headlights, all feature turned on, we recommend SENSOR
other exterior lights, and the that you turn on the lights manually
instrument panel lights when it when driving at night or in a dense
senses low ambient light. fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking

To turn on automatic lighting, turn structures.
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
when the outside light level becomes SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page 93 .
low (at dusk, for example). The
lights on indicator comes on as a Do not leave the light switch in
reminder. The lights and indicator AUTO if you will not be driving the
will turn off automatically when the vehicle for an extended period (a The automatic lighting feature is
system senses high ambient light. week or more). You should also turn controlled by a sensor located on top
off the lights if you plan to leave the of the dashboard. Do not cover this
The lights will remain on when you engine idling or off for a long time. sensor or spill liquids on it.
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you open
and close the driver’s door. To turn
them on again, either turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) or turn the
light switch to .
105
Headlights
Fog Lights If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL The automatic lighting off feature
Turn the fog lights on and off by SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- activates if you leave the headlight
turning the switch next to the information display, there is a switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
headlight switch. problem with the daytime running position or if the lights are turned on
light system. Take your vehicle to a by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
You can use the fog lights only when dealer to have it checked. position, turn the ignition switch to
the headlights are on low beam. LOCK (0), then open and close the
With the light switch in the AUTO When the multi-information display driver’s door.
position, you can also use the fog shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
lights when the headlights turn on daytime running lights are off. If you turn the ignition switch to
automatically. They will go off when Follow the procedure in the left LOCK (0) with the headlight switch
the headlights turn off. column to turn them on. on, but do not open the door and get
out, the lights turn off after 10
Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting Off Feature minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
With the headlight switch off, the This feature turns off the headlights, in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).
high beam headlights come on with all other exterior lights, and the
reduced brightness when you turn instrument panel lights within 15 The lights turn on again when you
the ignition switch to ON (II) and seconds after you turn the ignition unlock or open the driver’s door.
release the parking brake. They switch to LOCK (0) and close the If you unlock the door, but do not
remain on until you turn the ignition driver’s door. open it within 15 seconds, the lights
switch off, even if you set the go off. With the driver’s door open,
parking brake. To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO you will hear a lights-on reminder
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 92 . chime.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
106
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
The adaptive front lighting system AFS Indicator

(AFS) helps to improve visibility
during nighttime driving. The AFS If the AFS indicator comes on and
controls the aiming direction and starts blinking while driving, pull to
lighting distribution of the low the side of the road when it is safe,
beams according to the amount of and turn off the engine. If the AFS

turn applied to the steering wheel indicator keeps blinking, or starts
during cornering or turning. To turn blinking again while driving after
the AFS on, turn the ignition to ON turning the ignition switch to ON (II),
(II), and turn the headlights on. the AFS is not working properly (see
page 67 ). Have the AFS inspected
by your dealer.
Without AFS, your vehicle still has
normal lighting ability to continue
driving.
When the AFS indicator comes on,

you will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 76 ).
107
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Off Switch Here are some operating Automatic Headlight Adjusting
characteristics of the AFS: System
The AFS works with the automatic
The system requires an headlight adjusting system to sense
initialization period. It does not changes in vehicle height due to
begin to operate until you have driving and loading conditions of
driven the vehicle a short distance. passengers and luggage, and adjusts
the vertical aim of the low beam
At a stop, the right headlight turns headlights automatically adjusted to
right when you turn the steering compensate for load.
wheel to the right. But the left
headlight does not turn left when If the headlights do not seem to be
AFS OFF SWITCH you turn the steering wheel to the properly aimed, have the Auto
left. This prevents the left Leveling system inspected by your
This switch is at the right side of the headlight from pointing at dealer.
left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on oncoming traffic.
and off. When AFS is off, the AFS
indicator comes on as a reminder AFS is turned off when the shift
when you turn on the headlights. lever is in the R position.
108
Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button Instrument Panel Brightness

U.S. CANADA
ADJUSTMENT BUTTON
Push the button between the center Adjust the brightness of the The level of brightness is shown on
vents to turn on the hazard warning instrument panel by pressing the ＋ the multi-information display while
lights (four-way flashers). This or − button. Press the ＋ button to you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
causes all four outside turn signals increase the brightness and the − after you finish adjusting.
and both indicators in the instrument button to decrease it. You can adjust
panel to flash. Use the hazard the brightness with the headlight
warning lights if you need to park in switch on or off.
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
CONTINUED
109
Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger
To reduce glare at night, the Rear Window Defogger have to turn it on again when you
instrument panel illumination dims restart the vehicle.
when you turn the light switch to REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
or . To cancel the glare Make sure the rear window is clear
reduction function, set the and you have good visibility before
brightness to the highest level, then starting to drive.
press the ＋ button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled. The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
The rear window defogger clears fog,

frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. Pushing this button also
turns the mirror heaters on and off.
The indicator in the button comes on
to show the defogger is on. If you do
not turn it off, the defogger will shut
itself off after 5 to 40 minutes
(depending on the ambient
temperature). It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
110
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel adjustment

before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel

position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up, Release the switch when the
or down by pushing and holding the steering wheel reaches the desired
adjustment switch in that direction. position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
see the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
CONTINUED
111
Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you turn the ignition switch to If your vehicle’s battery is To reset the system when the auto tilt
LOCK (0) and release it, or remove disconnected or goes dead, or the and telescopic feature is turned off, do
the built-in key from the ignition fuse for the power tilt and telescopic this:
switch, the steering wheel steering wheel is removed, the Move the steering wheel to the
automatically moves fully in and up. power tilt and telescopic steering highest position and keep that
wheel system needs to be reset position by pushing and holding the
The steering wheel returns to its when you reconnect the battery or adjustment button for more than 1
original position when you push the installing the fuse. second. Then, move the steering
ignition switch or insert the built-in wheel to the most inward position,
key back in the ignition switch. To reset the system when the auto tilt and keep that position by pushing
and telescopic feature is turned on, do and holding the adjustment button
Steering wheel movement is also this: for more than 1 second.
controlled by the driving position Push the ignition switch for more
memory system (see page 124 ). than 1 second and release it, or
insert the built-in key into the
To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT & ignition switch, and remove it. The
TELESCOPIC’’ setting, see page 86 . steering wheel automatically moves
fully in and up to let you know the
system is reset.
112
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key These keys contain electronic

number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Acura-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

BUILT-IN KEYS KEY NUMBER TAG objects on them.
The built-in key (see page 141 ) fits Keep the keys away from liquids.
all the locks on your vehicle. If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.

Do not try to take them apart.
113
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
start. you turn the ignition switch to ON may not cause harmful interference, and
(II). (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to interference received, including
ON (II), the immobilizer system If the system repeatedly does not interference that may cause undesired
indicator should come on for a few recognize the coding of your remote operation.
seconds, then go out. If the indicator or built-in key, contact your dealer.
starts to blink, it means the system Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the Do not attempt to alter this system approved by the party responsible for
remote or built-in key. Turn the or add other devices to it. Electrical compliance could void the user’s
ignition switch to LOCK (0), release problems could result that may make authority to operate the equipment.
the ignition switch and push it, or your vehicle undriveable.
remove the built-in key, and reinsert This device complies with Industry
it. Then turn the switch to ON (II) If you have lost your remote or Canada Standard RSS-210.
again. built-in key and cannot start the Operation is subject to the following two
engine, contact your dealer. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
114
Ignition Switch
BUILT-IN KEY LOCK (0) − You can insert or START (III) − Use this position
remove the built-in key only in this only to start the engine. The switch
position. To turn the ignition switch, returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the shift lever must be in Park, and the ignition switch.
you must push the knob or built-in
key in slightly. You will hear a reminder beeper if

you do not turn the ignition switch to
If the front wheels are turned, the LOCK (0) or leave the built-in key in
anti-theft lock may make it difficult the ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
to turn the ignition switch. Firmly or ACCESSORY (I) position and
IGNITION SWITCH
turn the steering wheel to the left or open the driver’s door. Remove the
COVER right as you turn the ignition switch. built-in key to turn off the beeper.
The ignition switch has four ACCESSORY (I) − You can The shift lever must be in Park
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY operate the audio system and the before you turn the ignition switch
(I), ON (II), and START (III). accessory power socket in this knob to LOCK (0) or remove the
position. built-in key from the ignition switch.
To use the built-in key, you have to
remove the cover (see page 138 ). ON (II) − This is the normal
ignition switch position when driving.
Several of the indicators on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY (I) to ON (II).
115
Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER To lock any door when getting out of When you shift to P after driving, the
SWITCH the vehicle, pull the lock tab and driver’s door unlocks.
close the door.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
All doors can be locked from the UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 96 .
outside by using the built-in key in
the driver’s door. To unlock only the Lockout Prevention
driver’s door, insert the built-in key, With the driver’s door open and the
turn it clockwise, and release it. The built-in key in the ignition, both
remaining doors unlock when you master door lock switches are
turn the built-in key a second time disabled. They are not disabled if the
within a few seconds. driver’s door is closed. Pushing the
switch down on the open front
Each front door has a power door To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK passenger’s door will lock all doors.
lock master switch. Either switch MODE’’ setting, see page 89 . If you try to lock an open driver’s
locks and unlocks all doors. Push the door by pulling the lock tab rear
switch down to lock all doors and up When the vehicle speed reaches ward with the remote inside the
to unlock them. about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or vehicle and closing the driver’s door,
more, all the doors lock the all doors will unlock.
Each door has a lock tab above the automatically.
inside door handle. Pull the tab to
lock the door and push it to unlock. To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
When you pull the tab on the driver’s LOCK’’ setting, see page 95 .
door, all the doors lock.
116
Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON If the doors are locked, press the TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
boot release button on the boot lid
with the remote in keyless Access
operating range.
To close the trunk, press down on

the trunk lid.
You can open the trunk in any of If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
four ways: is disconnected, you can open the
Press the trunk release button on trunk from the rear seat by pulling
the driver’s door. the trunk release handle. Reach the
handle through the trunk pass-
Press and hold the trunk release through.
button on the remote.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
If the doors are unlocked, press while driving to avoid damaging the
the trunk release button on the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
trunk lid. getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 54 .
CONTINUED
117
Trunk, Childproof Door Locks
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH Emergency Trunk Opener Childproof Door Locks
RELEASE
LEVER LEVER
To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk-release button As a safety feature, your vehicle has The childproof door locks are
on the driver’s door, the trunk lid, a release lever on the right corner in designed to prevent children seated
and the remote. To do this, turn off the trunk so the trunk can be opened in the rear from accidentally opening
the trunk main switch in the glove from the inside. To open the trunk, the rear doors. Each rear door has a
box, lock the glove box, and lock the push the release lever to the left. lock lever near the edge. With the
trunk pass-through cover with the lever in the LOCK position, the door
built-in key. Parents should decide if their cannot be opened from the inside
children should be shown how to use regardless of the position of the lock
this feature. tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
For more information about child handle.
safety, see page 40 .
118
Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments

See pages 14 − 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start DRIVER’S SEAT PASSENGER’S SEAT
driving.
Moves the seat forward Adjusts the seat-back
and backward. angle forward or
backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and the Increases or decreases
rear of the seat up or the lumbar support.
down. (Driver’s seat
only)
Raises or lowers the seat.

(Driver’s seat only)
119
Seats
Head Restraints FRONT REAR

See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle has adjustable head

restraints on the front seats.
The head restraints help protect you

and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
RELEASE BUTTON TILT BUTTON
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the The head restraints adjust for height. You can raise the rear head
occupant’s head rests against the The tilt of the front head restraints is restraints by hand.
center of the restraint. also adjustable. You need both hands
to adjust the restraint. Do not To lower the rear head restraints for
attempt to adjust it while driving. To better visibility, press the rear head
raise it, pull upward. To lower the restraint tilt button on the ceiling
restraint, push the release button console.
sideways, and push the restraint
down. To adjust the tilt, pivot the
front head restraint to the desired
position.
120
Seats
Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
KNOB through are secured.
For security, this cover can be

locked and unlocked only with the

built-in key. To lock the cover, insert
the key, and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and

the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
COVER page 54 .
The rear seat armrest is in the Open the cover by pushing the knob
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down and pulling the cover down. To close
to use it. the cover, swing it up, and push
firmly on the top. Make sure it
latches properly.
121
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors INDICATOR SENSOR

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
AUTO BUTTON
The inside mirror can automatically

darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.
122
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. When you finish, move the Power Mirror Heaters
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.

Depending on the position of the
selector switch, the left or right side
mirror will pivot downward slightly
when you shift the transmission into
SELECTOR
reverse. In the left position, the left
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH mirror pivots. In the right position,
the right mirror pivots. This gives
1. Move the selector switch to L you a better view of that side of the The outside mirrors are heated to
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s vehicle while parallel parking. The remove fog and frost. With the
side). mirror returns to its original position ignition switch in the ON (II)
when you take the transmission out position, turn on the heaters by
2. Push the appropriate edge of the of reverse. To turn this feature off, pressing the button. The indicator in
adjustment switch to move the leave the switch in the center the button comes on as a reminder.
mirror right, left, up, or down. position. Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
Outside mirror positions can be turns the rear window defogger on
stored in the driving position and off.
memory system (see page 124 ).
123
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature Storing a Driving Position in MEMORY MEMO BUTTON
for the steering wheel, driver’s seat, Memory BUTTONS
and outside mirror positions. Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Two seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirror positions can be 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
stored in separate memories. You You cannot add a new driving
select a memorized position by position in the memory unless the
pushing the appropriate button. ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press the MEMO button on the

position (see page 119 ). driver’s door. You will hear a beep.
Adjust the steering wheel to a The indicator in the memory
comfortable position (see page buttons (1 and 2) will blink.
111). Immediately press one of the
Adjust the outside mirrors for best memory buttons (1 or 2) until you
visibility (see page 123 ). hear two beeps. The indicator in
the memory button will stay on.
The current positions of the
driver’s seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirrors are now stored.
124
To cancel the storing procedure Selecting a Memorized Position 2. Press the desired memory button
after pressing the MEMO button: (1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
MEMORY BUTTONS
Do not press a memory button The system will move the seat,
within 5 seconds. steering wheel, and outside mirrors
to the memorized positions. The

Readjust the seat or steering indicator in the selected memory
position. button will flash during movement.
When the adjustments are complete,
Readjust the outside mirror you will hear two beeps, and the
position. indicator will remain on.
Each memory button stores only one To change the ‘‘MEMORY

driving position. Storing a new POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
position erases the previous setting To select a memorized position, do 86 .
stored in that button’s memory. this:
All stored driving positions will be 1. Make sure the shift lever is in
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes Park.
dead or is disconnected.
CONTINUED
125
To stop the system’s automatic You can use the adjustment switches
adjustment, do any of the following: to change the positions of the seat,
steering wheel, or outside mirrors
Press any button on the control after they are in their memorized
panel: MEMO, 1, or 2. position. If you change the
memorized position, the indicator in
Push any of the adjustment the memory button will go out. To
switches for the seat or steering keep this driving position for later
wheel. use, you must store it in the driving
position memory.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If you select a memorized position

without pushing the ignition switch
knob or inserting the built-in key in
the ignition switch, only the seat and
outside mirrors will adjust. To get
the system to also adjust the steering
wheel, push and turn the ignition
switch or insert the built-in key in
the ignition switch. You will hear two
beeps when it is complete.
126
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has the Keyless Access Protect the remote and the built-in Always keep the remote and the
System. When you carry the remote key from direct sunlight, high built-in key away from any magnetic
with you, you can lock/unlock the temperature, and high humidity. material.
door(s), unlock the trunk, and start
the engine without using the built-in Do not drop the remote or the You should have received a key
key. built-in key, and do not set heavy number tag with your built-in key.

objects on them. You will need this key number if you
The system may not work if: ever have to get a lost key replaced.
The battery of the remote is weak. Keep the remote and the built-in key Use only Acura-approved key blanks.
There is strong electrical current away from liquids. If they get wet,
nearby. dry them immediately with a soft
You carry a cell phone, a laptop cloth.
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote. The built-in keys do not contain
The remote is covered by metal. batteries.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
When the vehicle battery is dead.
Make sure the driver always carries

the remote/built-in key set.
127
Keys
BUILT-IN KEYS KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES
OPERATING
RANGE
KEY NUMBER TAG
The following keys come with your the doors and unlock the trunk. from the trunk release switch.
vehicle. Refer to page 141 for how to When you carry the remote, you can
separate the keys. lock/unlock the doors, unlock the Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
trunk, and start the engine without a open the trunk if the remote is
Built-in Key key. within the operating range of the
This key is used to lock/unlock the door or the trunk.
doors, glove box, trunk pass-through You can lock/unlock the doors
cover, and to start the engine (after within a about 32 inches (about 80 The remote may not work if:
you remove the ignition switch cover, cm) radius from the outside door It is too close to the vehicle.
see page 138 ). handle. It is above or below the vehicle,
Keyless Access Remote You can open the trunk within a even when it is within its operating
This remote is used to lock/unlock about 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius range.
128
Unlocking the Door(s) All the doors unlock when you grab If you do not open any of the doors
the handle of the front passenger’s within 30 seconds, they will
door. automatically relock.
When you unlock the door(s), some If a remote is within operating range
exterior lights blink twice and the while you wash your vehicle or when

system beeps twice. it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by unlocking the doors.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page The unlock sensors do not operate
89 . when:
The remote is not within the
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS operating range.
BEEP’’ setting, see page 90 .
The handle of each front door has a The remote is too close to the
sensor. That sensor works with the If you grab the handle of the front vehicle.
remote so you can automatically door by the hand with glove, the
unlock/lock the door(s). door sensor may delay to respond or When the doors are unlocked.
not respond by unlocking the doors.
By default, only the driver’s door The remote battery is dead.
unlocks when you grab its handle.
The vehicle battery is dead.
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 89 .
129
Locking the Doors system beeps once. When you If you touch the door lock sensor of
cannot set the security system the front door by the hand with glove,
because the trunk or hood is open, the door sensor may delay to
no exterior light blinks and/or no respond or not respond by locking
beeper sounds. the doors.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS The lock sensors do not operate if:
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page The remote is not within the
89 . operating range.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS The doors are open.

BEEP’’ setting, see page 90 .
DOOR LOCK SENSOR The ignition switch is not in the
Within 2 seconds of touching the LOCK (0) position.
Each front door has a LOCK/ handle to lock the doors or locking
UNLOCK feature. the doors with remote, pull the The built-in key is in the ignition
handle to make sure the doors are switch.
When you touch the door lock actually locked. The door unlock
sensor of the front door by the hand, sensors do not operate for about 2 The remote is too close to the
all the doors and the trunk will lock. seconds after the doors are locked. vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure If a remote is within operating range The remote battery is dead.
the remote is not inside the vehicle. while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors The vehicle battery is dead.
When you lock the doors, some may respond by locking the doors.
exterior lights blink once and the
130
Door Lock Prevention Locking the Trunk Before closing the trunk, make sure
If you open a door, pull its lock tab, the remote is not in the trunk.
and shut it when the remote is inside
the vehicle, all the doors unlock. If you close the trunk when the
Make sure you carry the remote remote is in it, the system beeps, and
with you when you lock the doors. the trunk reopens.

PULL HANDLE
When you close the trunk with all

doors locked, the trunk will lock.
When you unlock all the doors with

the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
Use the pull handle when you close

the trunk.
131
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk The trunk cannot be locked if: Keyless Access Remote
The remote is too close to the
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH trunk lid. LED LOCK
The remote is on the interior rear BUTTON
panel.
The remote is too close to the
seatback of the rear seat or the
TRUNK
seat cushion. RELEASE
UNLOCK BUTTON
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times BUTTON
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from PANIC
getting into the interior. See Carbon BUTTON
Monoxide Hazard on page 54 .
When the trunk is locked, you can LOCK − Press this button once to
open it in any of these ways: lock all doors. Some exterior lights
Press the trunk open switch inside will flash. When you push LOCK
the vehicle. twice within 5 seconds, you will hear
Press the trunk button on the a beep to verify that the doors are
remote. locked and the security system is
Pull the trunk release switch when ready.
carrying the remote (the system
beeps once).
132
You cannot lock the doors if any UNLOCK − Press this button once To change the ‘‘SECURITY
door, the trunk, or the hood is not to unlock the driver’s door. Press it RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
fully closed if the built-in key is in twice to unlock the other doors. 98 .
the ignition switch, or if the ignition Some exterior lights will flash twice
switch is in any position except the each time you press the button. The To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
LOCK (0) position. ceiling light (if the ceiling light ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see

switch is in the DOOR position) will page 97 .
When you cannot set the security come on when you press the
system because the trunk or hood is UNLOCK button. If you do not open TRUNK − Press this button for
open, no exterior light blinks and/or any doors within 30 seconds, the about 1 second to open the trunk.
no beeps. ceiling light fades out. If you relock You cannot open the trunk if the
the doors with the remote before 30 built-in key is in the ignition or the
seconds have elapsed, the ceiling ignition switch is in any position
light will go off immediately. except the LOCK (0) position. You
cannot open the trunk with the
To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK remote if the trunk main switch is
MODE’’ setting, see page 89 . turned off.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT PANIC − Press this button for

DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 92 . about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound and the exterior
If you unlock the doors with the lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
remote, but do not open any doors To cancel panic mode, press any
within 30 seconds, the doors other button on the remote.
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
133
Keyless Memory SettingsTM Here are the settings activated with Some of them keeps the same
the remote; settings as they were set previously.
Driving position memory
(see page 124 ). To turn the keyless memory settings
back on, repeat this procedure. The
Customized settings LED will blink twice to indicate the
(see page 78 ). feature has been turned on.
Audio system settings Remote Transmitter Care

(see page 171 ). Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Climate control settings
DRIVER’S ID (see page 163 ). Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
When you unlock the door with your Navigation system preferences
remote, each remote activates the (see the navigation system owner’s Do not immerse the transmitter in
keyless memory settings related to manual). any liquid.
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back To turn off this feature, press and If you lose a transmitter, the
of each remote. hold the LOCK and UNLOCK replacement needs to be
buttons at the same time. The LED reprogrammed by your dealer.
in the remote will blink once. Then
release the buttons. Doing this
cancels the keyless memory settings
for that remote and restores the
default settings.
134
Replacing the Remote Battery As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Replace the batteries if necessary. Replace the old batteries with new
Battery type: CR2025 batteries. Place the batteries so the This device complies with Industry
＋ side is facing up. Snap the two Canada Standard RSS-210.
Remove the built-in key. halves of the remote case back Operation is subject to the following two
together. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Remove the upper half by carefully interference, and (2) this device must
prying on the edge with a coin. accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
135
Ignition Switch Operating Range
Make sure you know where the remote

is when you are inside the vehicle.
Remember that you can start the engine

without using the built-in key when the
remote is inside the vehicle.
Make sure you always carry the remote

with you.
If you lose your remote, call Acura

Client Services at (800) 382-2238 (U.S.
The engine may not run, and some The engine may not start if the models).
malfunctions may occur, if the remote is subjected to strong radio
remote is: waves.
Outside the vehicle.
On the dashboard. Also, the engine may not start if the
On the rear interior panel. remote is too close to the windows.
In the glove box.
In the door pockets.
In the trunk, etc.
136
Ignition Switch the beep, the steering wheel is To turn the ignition switch to the
locked. To unlock the steering wheel, LOCK (0) position, put the
turn it right and left while turning transmission in Park, press the
the ignition switch at the same time. switch in, and turn it to LOCK (0).
If the remote and the vehicle do not When the transmission is not in Park,
recognize each other, turn the you cannot turn the ignition switch

ignition switch to the LOCK (0) to the LOCK (0) position.
position, remove the ignition switch
cover, insert the built-in key, and Before leaving the vehicle, make
turn the switch (see pages 115 and sure the ignition switch is in the
138 ). LOCK (0) position.
If you open the driver’s door with the

ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
When you push the ignition switch, (I) position, the beeper will sound.
the remote and the vehicle recognize Also, if you close the door when the
each other. After the recognition, ignition switch is not in the LOCK
the remote indicator flashes, and a (0) position and the remote is not
beeper sounds once. After the beep, inside the vehicle, the keyless access
turn the ignition switch. alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a
When the remote is out of the message appears on the multi-
operating range, the ignition switch information display, and the beeper
is locked. sounds if the ignition switch is in the
If the ignition switch cannot be ON (II) position.
turned from the LOCK (0) position
to the ACCESSORY (I) position after CONTINUED
137
When the beeper sounds after you Removing the Ignition Switch Beeper and Message
close the driver’s door outside the Cover Keyless Remote Not Detected
vehicle, check the position of the
ignition switch and the location of IGNITION SWITCH COVER
the remote.
If the engine is running and you

remove the remote from the vehicle,
it will continue to run. But once pull
turned to the LOCK (0) position, the
engine will not restart until a remote
is brought back into the vehicle.
push
BUILT-IN KEY
To remove the ignition switch cover, When you are pressing the ignition
insert the built-in key (see page 141 ), switch, or when the ignition switch is
then pull the cover out by pulling the in the ON (II) position, the beeper
built-in key while pushing it. sounds if you take the remote out of
the vehicle and close the door.
138
The outside beeper sounds when The engine does not restart if you Keyless Remote Low Battery
the ignition switch is in the turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) (0) position when the remote is
position. outside the vehicle. Check where the
remote is. Make sure that you carry
When the ignition switch is in the the remote or built-in key with you

ON (II) position, the multi- when you operate the ignition switch.
information display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOT If you pass the remote through an
DETECTED,’’ and the inside and open window, the system does not
outside beepers sound. respond. Also, even when the remote
The multi-information display is inside the vehicle, the beeper may
message goes away when you sound when the location of the
bring the remote back inside the remote is not detected due to
vehicle, and close the door or surrounding conditions. It is not a The batteries in the remote normally
apply the parking brake. failure. Make sure that you carry the lasts about 2 years. To ensure
remote with you. maximum battery life, do not store
If the engine is running and you the remote close to electrical devices
remove the remote from the such as computers or TVs. When the
vehicle, it will continue to run. multi-information display shows
Once turned to the LOCK (0) ‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE LOW
position, the engine will not restart BATTERY,’’ replace the batteries as
until a remote is brought back into soon as possible (see page 135 ).
the vehicle.
CONTINUED
139
Check Keyless Access System The indicator stays on while you If you lose or drop your remote, and
are driving. the beeper sounds, contact Acura
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM Client Services at (800) 382-2238
INDICATOR
The indicator comes on with the (U.S. models)
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
The multi-information display

shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’
In this case, use the built-in key to

lock/unlock the doors and start the
engine.
The indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer if:
140
Built-in key and Remote The keyless access system uses Valet Function
electric current to identify the The trunk and glove box cannot be
BUILT-IN KEY remote with the vehicle. opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
If you use medical equipment such box and trunk pass-through cover
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your with the built-in key. Also, the trunk

doctor if the electric current used by cannot be opened by using the
the remote will affect it. remote.
RELEASE BUTTON
The built-in key can be inserted into

the remote.
As shown above, keep inserting the
built-in key until it is locked. To
remove the built-in key, pull it out
while you press the release button.
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.
141
Seat Heaters (U.S. models)
In HI, the heater turns off when the

seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.

It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever

you use the seat heaters:
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES Use the HI setting only to heat the

seats quickly, because it draws
Both front seats are equipped with large amounts of current from the
seat heaters. The passenger seat battery.
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system. If the engine is left idling for an
The ignition switch must be in the extended period, do not use the
ON (II) position to use the heaters. seat heaters, even on the LO
Push the top of the switch, HI, to setting. It can weaken the battery,
rapidly heat up the seat. After the causing hard starting.
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
142
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
▲ BUTTON To use the heaters, press the ▲ In LOW, the heater runs
button. The indicator next to the continuously.
button will come on. There are three
settings in the heaters: To ventilate the seat, press the ▼
HI − Three indicators on. button. The indicator next to the
MID − Two indicators on. button will come on. The air

LO − One indicator on. ventilation system has three settings:
OFF − All indicators off.
HI − Three indicators on.
▼ BUTTON When you press the ▲ button once, MID − Two indicators on.
the heater is set to HI. After the seat LO − One indicator on.
INDICATORS reaches a comfortable temperature, OFF − All indicators off.
select MID or LOW by pressing the
Both front seats are equipped with ▼ button. This will keep the seat When you press the ▼ button once,
seat heaters and an air ventilation warm. To shut down the heater, the system is set to HI. To change to
system. The passenger seat only has press the ▼ button until the the lower mode, press the ▲ button.
heaters in the seat bottom because indicators go off. To turn the air ventilation off, press
of the side airbag system. The the ▲ button until the indicators go
ignition switch must be in the ON In HI, when the seat gets warm, the off.
(II) position to use the heaters and heater will change to MID after
the air ventilation system. about 5 minutes.
In MID, the heater will change to

LOW after about 60 minutes.
CONTINUED
143
Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)
Follow these precautions whenever

you use the seat heaters and the seat
ventilation:
Use the HI setting only to heat or

to ventilate the seats quickly,
because it draws large amounts of
current from the battery.
If the engine is left idling for an

extended period, do not use the
seat heaters or the seat ventilation,
even on the LO setting. It can
weaken the battery, causing hard
starting.
144
Power Windows
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)

before operating any of the window DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
switches. To open a window, push Closing a power window on
the switch down and hold it. To close someone’s hands or fingers can
the window, pull the switch up and cause serious injury.
hold it. Release the switch to stop

the window. Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
MAIN SWITCH
If the MAIN switch is pushed down

(OFF), the passenger windows
cannot be raised or lowered. Keep
the MAIN switch off when you have
children in the vehicle so they do not
injure themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
CONTINUED
145
Power Windows
AUTO − To open the window fully, To open or close the window The indicators in the switches come
push the window switch firmly down partially, push down or pull back on on when you turn the ignition switch
to the second detent, then release it. the window switch lightly to the first to ON (II).
The window automatically goes detent, and hold it. The window will
down all the way. To stop the stop when you release the switch. The power windows have a key-off
window from going all the way down, delay. You can still open and close
pull back on the window switch All window switches also have the the windows for up to 10 minutes
briefly. AUTO feature. after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay cancels as soon as
To close the window fully, pull back Auto Reverse you open either front door. You must
the window switch firmly to the If the window runs into any obstacle then turn the ignition switch to ON
second detent, then release it. The while it is closing automatically, it (II) for the power windows to
window automatically goes all the will reverse direction, and then stop. operate.
way up. To stop the window from To close the window, remove the
going all the way up, push down on obstacle, then use the window switch
the window switch briefly. again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the

window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
146
Power Windows, Moonroof
Opening the Windows and UNLOCK BUTTON 2. Turn the key clockwise, then
Moonroof with the Remote release it.
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the 3. Turn the built-in key clockwise
remote. again, and hold it. All four
1. Press the UNLOCK button once windows and the moonroof start to

Open
to unlock the driver’s door. open. To stop the windows and
Close
moonroof, release the built-in key.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the 4. When the windows or moonroof
doors unlock, and all four windows stops before opening fully, to open
and moonroof start to open. To the windows and moonroof further,
stop the windows and moonroof, turn and hold the key again
release the button. Opening/Closing the Windows (within 15 seconds).
and Moonroof with the Built-in
3. To open the windows and Key
moonroof further, press the You can open and close the windows
button again and hold it. If the and moonroof with the built-in key in
windows and the moonroof stop the driver’s door lock.
before the desired position, repeat
steps 1 and 2. To open:
1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
You cannot close the windows or the door lock.
moonroof with the remote.
CONTINUED
147
Power Windows, Moonroof
To close: Opening/Closing the Moonroof MOONROOF SWITCH

1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s with the Ceiling Console Switch
door lock. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
before operating the moonroof
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, switch on the ceiling console. To
then release it. open the moonroof, pull back the
moonroof switch. To close the
3. Turn the key counterclockwise moonroof, push the moonroof switch
again, and hold it. All four forward. Release the switch to stop
windows and the moonroof start to the moonroof.
close. To stop the windows and
moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and To open the moonroof fully, pull

moonroof further, turn and hold back the moonroof switch firmly.
the key again (within 15 seconds). The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
NOTE: If the windows and moonroof fully, push the switch forward briefly.
stop before the desired position,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
148
Moonroof
To tilt the moonroof, push the center To open or close the moonroof
of the moonroof switch straight up. partially, pull back or push forward
To stop the moonroof from tilting on the moonroof switch lightly to the Opening or closing the
fully open, push the moonroof switch first detent, and hold it. The moonroof on someone’s hands
forward. moonroof will stop when you release or fingers can cause serious
the switch. injury.

To close the moonroof fully, push Make sure all hands and fingers
the moonroof switch forward to the are clear of the moonroof
second detent, then release it. The before opening or closing it.
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way, pull back the moonroof switch
briefly.
149
Moonroof
Auto Reverse The moonroof has a key-off delay. Operating the Moonroof with the
If the moonroof runs into any You can still open and close the Remote Transmitter or the Key
obstacle while it is closing moonroof for up to 10 minutes after You can use the remote transmitter
automatically, it will reverse you turn off the ignition switch. The or the key to operate the moonroof
direction, and then stop. To close the key-off delay cancels as soon as you from the outside. Refer to page
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then open either front door. You must 147 for details.
use the moonroof switch again. then turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) for the moonroof to operate.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away If you try to open the moonroof in
from the moonroof before closing it. below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
150
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is put into gear

with the parking brake on.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake indicator on the instrument
panel should go out when the
parking brake is fully released with
the engine running (see page 61 ).
151
Interior Convenience Items
FRONT DOOR POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ASHTRAY
BEVERAGE HOLDER
GLOVE BOX/OWNER’S MANUAL TRAY
UTILITY POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
152
Glove Box RELEASE BUTTON

Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the built-in key.

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Your vehicle has an owner’s manual To close the tray, push it up.
Always keep the glove box tray inside the glove box. To open
closed while driving. the tray, push the release button up.
153
Beverage Holders
KNOB
LID Pull up Press
BUTTON
BOTTOM PLATE SEPARATOR BOTTOM PLATE
Be careful when you are using the For a short container, put the bottom For a long container, press the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid plate down, and pull up the knob to button in the beverage holder to
that is very hot can scald you or your use the separator. raise the bottom plate. Stand the
passengers. Spilled liquids can separator up.
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To use the beverage holder, push

the lid.
154
Console Compartment
LEVER

LEVER
The rear beverage holder is in the To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray
rear seat armrest. Open the pull up on the lever and lift the located in the console compartment
beverage holder by pushing the front armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
of it. lever, and lift the armrest pad.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
The console compartment light is on

when the light switch is in the
or position.
155
Sun Visors Do not use the sun visor extension Accessory Power Sockets
feature over the rear view mirror.
Make sure to slide a sun visor

forward to set it to the normal length
before flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor

back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
To use a sun visor, pull it down. You There are two accessory power
can also use a sun visor at the side sockets. One is located in the front
window. Remove the support rod of the center console. To use the
from the clip, and swing the sun power socket, push and release the
visor toward the side window. lid, then push it forward until the
You can extend the sun visor further socket comes to the proper position
by pulling it back. to use.
156
Rear Ashtrays Front Door Pockets

TAB LID
The other socket is under the Small, rear ashtrays are located in The interior of each front door has
armrest in the console compartment the armrests of both rear doors. To an extendable pocket for maps and
storage area. To use the power open an ashtray, pivot the lid up. other small, lightweight items. For
socket, pull up the cover. safety, be sure both front door
To remove an ashtray for emptying, pockets are closed while driving.
These sockets are intended to supply open the lid, then carefully pull the
power for 12 volt DC accessories tab inside ashtray straight up and out When the light switch is in the
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 of the armrest. or position, the front door
amps). pocket light is on.
The rear ashtray light is on when the
They will not power an automotive light switch is in the or
type cigarette lighter element. position.
157
Power Rear Sunshade When you shift to reverse, the

sunshade goes down automatically.
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON To use it again, shift to another
position, and push the button to raise
it.
If the sunshade stops while moving,
check for and clear any obstacles,
then push the button again.

(II) position, push the power
sunshade button on the ceiling
console to raise the rear sunshade.
Push the button again to lower it.
158
Integrated Sunshades The hooks are intended for use only To prevent the integrated sunshades
by the sunshades. Do not hang any from being unhooked due to winds,
HOOK HOLDER TAB other items on the hooks, as that leave the rear windows closed while
could interfere with proper operation driving.
of the side curtain airbags.

HOLE
Each rear door has an integrated

sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, insert the
sunshade into the holder, and pull
the sunshade all the way up. Insert
the holes on the sunshade into the
hooks on the window frame.
159
Interior Lights
Ceiling Lights After pushing the DOOR button, all

the lights come on when you open
any door, unlock the doors with the CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS
remote or built-in key, or turn the
ignition switch from the ON (II) or
ACCESSORY (I) position to the
LOCK (0) position. The indicator in
REAR
the button comes on as a reminder.
FRONT
ON DOOR OFF CEILING LIGHT

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTONS
The front and rear of the ceiling Push each ceiling light button to turn
have ceiling lights. its light on and off.
Push the ON button to turn on all the To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
ceiling lights. Push the OFF button DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
to turn them off. 92 .
160
Features
The climate control systems in your Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate
vehicle provide a comfortable driving Control ....................................... 162
environment in all weather Climate Control Sensors .............. 170
conditions. Audio System ................................ 171
Playing the AM/FM Radio .......... 172
The standard audio system has AM/FM Radio Reception ............ 176
many features. This section de- Adjusting the Sound ..................... 178
scribes those features and how to Playing the XM Satellite
Features
use them. Radio .......................................... 181
Playing Discs ................................. 187
The climate control system and the Protecting Your Discs .................. 196
audio system have the voice control Disc Changer Error Messages ... 197
feature. Refer to the navigation Remote Audio Controls ................ 198
system owner’s manual for this Radio Theft Protection ................. 199
feature. Security System ............................ 200
Cruise Control ............................... 201
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio HomeLink Universal
system that requires a code number Transceiver ................................ 204
to enable it. AcuraLink ...................................... 208
OnStar ............................................ 217
The security system helps to HandsFreeLinkTM .......................... 230
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
161
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BARS
DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY DEFROSTER BUTTON
AUTO OFF
BUTTON BUTTON
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
HEATER
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
A/C
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
162
Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left, Personalization Setting

Many climate control functions can right, up, down, and in. Use the When you unlock the doors with
still be controlled by standard selector to scroll through lists, to your remote, the driver’s ID (Driver
buttons, dials, and knobs, but some select menus, and to highlight menu 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
functions can only be accessed using items. When you make a selection, climate control settings are turned to
the interface dial. The interface dial push the center of the selector the respective mode automatically
has two parts, a knob and a selector. (ENTER) to go to that selection. when the ignition is turned to the
ON (II) position.
Features
KNOB
ENTER
SELECTOR
The knob turns left and right. Use it

to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
163
Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)

To select the desired temperature, Press the A/C button to view the
push the temperature control bar up climate control display. Pushing
or down. ENTER on the interface selector
turns the air conditioning on and off.
To set the driver’s and passenger’s You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in
temperature separately, press the the display.
DUAL button. The indicator in the
button will come on. The driver and When you turn the A/C off, the
passenger can each set the system cannot regulate the inside
temperature to the desired setting. temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
To make the driver’s and passenger’s outside temperature.
temperature the same, push the
Press the A/C button to view the DUAL button again. The indicator in
climate control display, then turn the the button goes out, and the
interface knob to increase or passenger’s temperature is set to the
decrease the fan speed and airflow. driver’s temperature.
164
Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button Mode Control

When the indicator in the button is This button turns the windshield
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defrost on and off.
sent throughout the system again. When you push this button, air flows
When the indicator is off, air is from the defroster vents at the base
brought in from the outside of the of the windshield, and the system
vehicle (fresh air mode). automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
Features
The outside air intakes for the the indicator in the button is on, the
climate control system are at the passenger’s temperature cannot be
base of the windshield. Keep this set separately from the driver’s.
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Rear Window Defogger
The system should be left in fresh Button
air mode under almost all conditions. This button turns the rear window You can select the vents air flows
Keeping the system in recirculation defogger on and off (see page 110 ). from. Some air will flow from the
mode, particularly with the A/C off, Pushing this button also turns the dashboard corner and side vents in
can cause the windows to fog up. power mirror heaters on and off. all modes.
Switch to recirculation mode when Press the A/C button to view the
driving through dusty or smoky climate control display, then push
conditions, then return to fresh air the interface selector down. Select
mode. any of the modes by turning the
interface knob.
CONTINUED
165
Air flows from the center

and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between

the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor

vents.
Airflow is divided between

the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When is selected, you can
increase or decrease the
temperature of airflow from the
dashboard vent for the driver’s side
and the passenger’s side without
changing the temperature of airflow
from the floor vent.
Push the interface selector right or

left, then turn the interface knob to
select the desired temperature.
166
Dual Button Using the Heater 1. Press the A/C button to view
You can set the temperature for the The heater uses engine coolant to the climate control display.
driver’s side and the passenger’s side warm the air. If the engine is cold, it 2. Turn on the A/C by pushing
separately when this button is will be several minutes before you ENTER on the interface selector.
pressed (indicator on). When the feel warm air coming from the You will see A/C ON in the display.
indicator in the DUAL button is off, system. 3. Make sure the temperature is set
you can adjust both sides to the to maximum cool.
same temperature with the driver’s 1. Press the A/C button to view 4. Push the interface selector down,
Features
side temperature control bar. the climate control display. then select by turning the
2. Turn the interface knob to set the interface knob.
Ventilation fan to the desired speed. 5. If the outside air is humid, select
The flow-through ventilation system 3. Push the interface selector down, recirculation mode. If the outside
draws in outside air, circulates it then select and fresh air air is dry, select fresh air mode.
through the interior, then exhausts it mode. 6. Push the interface selector down,
through vents near the rear window. 4. Adjust the warmth of the air with then set the fan to the desired
the temperature control bars. speed by turning the interface
1. Set the temperature to the lower knob.
limit. Using the A/C
2. Make sure the A/C is off. Air conditioning places an extra load If the interior is very warm, you can
3. Select and fresh air mode. on the engine. Watch the engine cool it down more rapidly by partially
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. coolant temperature gauge (see page opening the windows, turning on the
68 ). If it moves near the red zone, A/C, and setting the fan to
turn off the A/C until the gauge maximum speed in fresh air mode.
reading returns to normal.
167
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
moisture from the air. When used in windows: 1. Select . The system
combination with the heater, it automatically switches to fresh air
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or mode and turns on the A/C.
high for faster defrosting. 2. Select .
1. Switch the fan on. 2. Select . The system 3. Set the fan and temperature
2. Turn on the air conditioning. automatically switches to fresh air controls to maximum level.
3. Select and fresh air mode. mode and turns on the A/C.
4. Adjust the temperature to your 3. Adjust the temperature so the To clear the windshield faster, you
preference. airflow feels warm. can close the dashboard corner vents
4. Select to help clear the by rotating the wheel next it. This
This setting is suitable for all driving rear window. sends more warm air to the
conditions whenever the outside 5. To increase airflow to the windshield defroster vents. Once the
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). windshield, close the corner vents. windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
When you switch to another mode windows.
from , the A/C setting
returns to the previous setting (on or For your safety, make sure you have
off). Select A/C, then press ENTER a clear view through all the windows
on the interface selector to turn the before driving.
A/C off if it is on.
168
Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects the Semi-automatic Operation
The automatic climate control proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various
system adjusts the fan speed and heated air that will, as quickly as functions of the climate control
airflow levels to maintain the interior possible, raise or lower the interior system when it is in fully automatic
temperature you select. temperature to your preference. mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s When you set the temperature to its manual selection causes the word
interior temperature is lower or its upper limit, the system AUTO in the display to go out.
Features
independently regulated for the runs at full cooling or heating only. It
driver and passenger. If the driver’s does not regulate the interior To Turn Everything Off
side of the vehicle is getting too temperature. Press the OFF button. However, a
much sun, the system will adjust to a lack of airflow can cause the
lower temperature. When you change the fan speed, the windows to fog up. You should keep
fan is taken out of AUTO mode and the fan on at all times so stale air and
1. Press the AUTO button. starts to run at the selected speed. moisture do not build up in the
2. Set the desired temperature with interior and cause fogging.
the temperature control bars.
You will see AUTO in the display
if the climate mode is selected.
169
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two

sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
170
Audio System
Interface Dial The knob turns left and right. Use it Personalization Setting
Most audio system functions can still to make selections or adjustments to When you unlock the doors with
be controlled by standard buttons, a list or menu on the screen. your remote and turn the audio
dials, and knobs, but some functions system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
can only be accessed using the The selector can be pushed left, or Driver 2) is detected, and the
interface dial. The interface dial has right, up, down, and in. Use the radio preset memory (see page 174 ),
two parts, a knob and a selector. selector to scroll through lists, to the auto select preset memory (see
select menus, and to highlight menu page 175 ), and the volume and
Features
KNOB items. When you make a selection, sound level settings (see page 178 )
ENTER push the center of the selector are turned to the respective
(ENTER) to go to that selection. memorized mode automatically.
SELECTOR
171
Playing the AM/FM Radio
UPPER DISPLAY
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian) Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models
FM BUTTON
POWER/ POWER/
VOLUME AM/FM VOLUME AM BUTTON
KNOB BUTTON KNOB
TUNE
SEEK TUNE SEEK BUTTONS
BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS
SCAN AUTO
SCAN SELECT
BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO AUDIO
DISPLAY DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL PRESET BUTTONS INTERFACE DIAL PRESET BUTTONS
172
The band and frequency that the

STEREO ICON BAND
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button (AM or FM
button on Canadian, Alaskan and
Hawaiian models). You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
Features
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the TUNE ICON
upper display, if the station is
To Play the AM/FM Radio broadcasting in stereo. Stereo TUNE − Use the TUNE button to
The ignition switch must be in the reproduction on AM is not available. tune the radio to a desired frequency.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Press the button to tune to a
Press the AUDIO button to view the To Select a Station higher frequency, or the button
audio control display. Turn the You can use any of five methods to to tune to a lower frequency. To tune
system on by pressing the power/ find radio stations on the selected with the interface dial, push the
volume knob or the AM/FM button band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the selector down, and turn the knob to
(AM or FM button on Canadian, preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . TUNE. Then press ENTER on the
Alaskan and Hawaiian models). selector, and turn the knob to the
Adjust the volume by turning the desired frequency. To exit the
power/volume knob. TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector.
CONTINUED
173
SEEK − The SEEK function To scan with the interface dial, push Preset − Each preset button or
searches up and down from the the selector down, and then push it preset icon can store one frequency
current frequency to find a station to the right. You will see SCAN on AM and two frequencies on FM.
with a strong signal. To activate it, flashing on the screen.
press the or SEEK button, To store a preset memory location:
then release it. You can also activate The system will scan for a station 1. Select the desired band, AM or
SEEK by pushing the interface with a strong signal. When it finds FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
selector to the right or left. one, it will stop and play that station two frequencies with each preset
for about 10 seconds. If you do button (icon).
nothing, the system will then scan
SCAN ICON
for the next strong station and play it 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
for 10 seconds. When it plays a function to tune the radio to a
station that you want to listen to, desired station.
press the scan button again, or push
the interface selector to the right 3. Press the preset button, and hold
again. it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
SCAN − The SCAN function it for more than 2 seconds.
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
activate it, press the SCAN button, total of six stations on AM and
then release it. twelve stations on FM.
174
system goes into scan mode for To turn off auto select, press
AUTO SEL ICON several seconds. ENTER on the interface selector
(press the A.SEL button) again. This
Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian restores the presets you originally
models set.
Press the A.SEL button. You will see
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
system goes into scan mode for
Features
several seconds. The system stores
the frequencies of six AM and
twelve FM stations in the preset
buttons.
AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
traveling far from home and can no select cannot find a strong station for
longer receive your preset stations, every preset button.
you can use the auto select feature to If you do not like the stations auto
find stations in the local area. select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
U.S. models (except Alaskan and buttons (icons) as previously
Hawaiian) described.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
175
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 AM station, you will notice the sound
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). volume becoming weaker and the
Stations on the FM band are station drifting in and out. If you are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
Stations must use these exact Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
frequencies. It is fairly common for go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
stations to round-off the frequency in completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
their advertising, so your radio could the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
display a frequency of 100.9 even are close to.
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
176
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
177
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and

FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the AudioPilot and
Centerpoint features (when playing
a CD-DA) to on or off.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust

by pushing the interface selector up
or down, or by turning the interface
knob.
SOUND ICON
178
Adjusting the Sound
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass FADER/BALANCE − These CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, modes adjust the strength of the adjust the strength of the sound
and press ENTER on the interface sound coming from each speaker. from the center or subwoofer
selector. The current setting is Fader adjusts the front-to-back speaker, select it and press ENTER
shown on the display. Turn the strength, while balance adjusts the on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level, side-to-side strength. To adjust fader interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing and balance, select FADER or and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. BALANCE, then press ENTER on ENTER on the interface selector.
Features
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
CONTINUED
179
Adjusting the Sound
AudioPilot − Bose AudioPilot Centerpoint − Bose Centerpoint AudioPilot and Centerpoint are
digital processing monitors sound signal processing processes stereo registered trade marks of the Bose
within the cabin, and helps and matrix surround recordings to corporation.
compensate for unwanted ambient five independent channels, delivering
noise with no perceived change in a multi-channel surround sound
audio volume. experience, even from conventional
stereo discs.
To set this feature on or off, select
AudioPilot, and press ENTER on the To set this feature on or off, select
interface selector. Turn the interface Centerpoint, and press ENTER on
knob to ON or OFF, and press the interface selector. Turn the
ENTER on the interface selector. interface knob to ON or OFF, and
The ON or OFF indicator is shown press ENTER on the interface
on the screen. selector. The ON or OFF indicator is
shown on the display.
NOTE: Centerpoint is only available

when listening to a CD (CD-DA).
180
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)
SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
POWER/
TUNE
Features
VOLUME
KNOB BUTTONS
CATEGORY
BUTTONS DISPLAY/
MODE
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL PRESET BUTTON
181
Your vehicle is capable of receiving You may experience periods when

XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the MODE XM Satellite Radio does not transmit
United States, except Hawaii and the artist’s name and or the song title
Alaska. information. If this happens, there is
XM is a registered trade mark of nothing wrong with your system.
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Push the AUDIO button to display
XM Satellite Radio receives signals XM information on the screen.
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It To change categories, press the
offers many channels in several CATEGORY button, or push the
categories. Along with a large interface selector left or right.
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to MODE − To switch between the
view channel and category selections category mode and channel mode,
in the audio display. press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes. The
To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turn CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
the ignition switch to ACCESSORY displayed on the screen.
(I) or ON (II). Push the power/
volume knob to turn on the audio In the category mode, such as Jazz,
system, and press the button. Rock, Classical, etc., you can
The last channel you listened to will navigate through all of the channels
show in the display. Adjust the within that category. In the channel
volume by turning the power/ mode, you can select all of the
volume knob. available channels.
182
The system plays each channel in

SCAN ICON numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again.
Features
TUNE ICON
To change channels, press the SCAN − The scan function gives

TUNE button, or scroll down with you a sampling of all channels while
the interface selector, select TUNE, in the channel mode. In the category
and press ENTER on the selector. mode, only the channels within that
Then turn the interface knob to the category are scanned. To activate
desired channel. In the category SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
mode, you can only select channels scan with the interface dial, scroll
within that category. down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen.
CONTINUED
183
2. Use the TUNE or SCAN function

MODE INDICATION XM to tune to a desired channel.
BAND
In the category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In the channel mode, all channels
can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want

for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the

Preset − You can store up to 12 first six channels.
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one 5. Press the button or scroll
channel from the XM1 band and one up again. The other XM band will
channel from the XM2 band. be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
To store a channel:
1. Press the button or scroll Once a channel is stored, press and
up by pushing the interface release the proper preset button to
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2 tune to it.
will be shown on the display.
184
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
Features
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
CONTINUED
185
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for Your I.D. will appear in the display.
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. After you’ve registered with XM
Driving on the north side of an Radio, keep your audio system in the
east/west mountain road. Receiving XM Satellite Radio Satellite Radio mode while you wait
Driving on the north side of a Service for activation. This should take about
large commercial truck on an If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
east/west road. or you purchased your vehicle from
Driving in tunnels. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving on a road beside a vertical sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
of you. ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
Driving on the lower level of a (I) or ON (II) position, push the or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
multi-tiered road. POWER/VOLUME knob to turn on and you’ll be able to listen to XM
Driving on a single lane road the audio system, and press the Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
alongside dense trees taller than button. A variety of music continue to send an activation signal
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. types and styles will play. to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
There may be other geographic If you decide to purchase XM service has not been activated after
situations that could affect satellite Satellite Radio service, contact XM 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
radio reception. Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
186
Playing Discs
UPPER DISPLAY
Features
U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian) Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models
LOAD EJECT LOAD EJECT
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
DISC DISC
BUTTON BUTTON
SKIP TUNE SKIP TUNE
BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS BUTTONS
SCAN POWER/ SCAN POWER/
BUTTON VOLUME BUTTON VOLUME
KNOB KNOB
AUDIO AUDIO
DISPLAY DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
187
Playing Discs
Your vehicle’s audio system has an The changer can also play MP3 or
in-dash disc changer with the same WMA formats (see page 193 ).
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY verification standards may not be
(I) or ON (II) position. playable.
The disc changer can play these disc The changer cannot play DVD-V or
formats: DVD-R/RW formats.
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
DVD-A discs are not playable.
DTSTM
‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
The disc packages or jackets should are registered trademark of Digital
have one of these marks. Theater System, Inc.
You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
188
Playing Discs
Loading Discs in the Changer To load a single disc: You can select the position to load a
To load multiple discs in one 1. Press and release the LOAD disc. Turn the interface knob to
operation: button. select the position, then press
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY ENTER on the selector. This starts
(I) or ON (II), press and hold the the loading sequence. If you do not
LOAD button until you hear a select the position, the system loads
beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper the disc to the first empty position in
display, then release the button. numerical order.
Features
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it If you press the LOAD button while
only about halfway; the drive will a disc is playing, the system will stop
pull it in the rest of the way. playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the the disc just loaded.
upper display again, insert the
next disc into the slot.
2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
4. Repeat this until all six positions for an empty position in the
are loaded. The system will then changer. When the green load
begin playing the last disc loaded. indicator comes on and you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,
If you stop loading discs before all insert the disc into the slot. Insert
six positions are filled, the system it only about halfway; the drive will
will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load pull it in the rest of the way.
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
189
Playing Discs
To Play a Disc To Change Tracks To Choose a Track

Each time you press and release the
button or push the interface CURRENT TRACK
selector to the right, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
button or push the interface
selector to the left to skip backward
to the beginning of the current track.
Press the button or push the
interface selector to the left again to
skip to the previous track.
CURRENT DISC To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the / or /
Select the changer by pressing the button. You can also choose a track directly
DISC button. The system will begin from a track list. Press ENTER on
playing the last selected disc in the NOTE: the interface selector, and the track
disc changer. You will see the Since album and track names are not list screen will be shown. If there are
current disc position highlighted. included in most commercially no track names, track numbers are
recorded CDs, you will not see that displayed. You will see the current
To select a different disc, press the information on the audio screen track is highlighted. Turn the
corresponding number on the preset when you play them. Normally, interface knob to select the desired
buttons, or turn the interface knob to album and track names are displayed track, then press ENTER on the
highlight the desired disc, then press only by CDs recorded on a personal interface selector.
ENTER on the interface selector. computer, MP3 discs, and WMA
discs.
190
Playing Discs
To exit the track list display, press to the left again within 10 seconds. seconds. You will see SCAN next to
the AUDIO button, or push the DISC on the screen. To hear the rest
interface selector to the left. If you don’t, the system advances to of the disc, press the SCAN button
the next track, plays about 10 or push the interface selector to the
Track Scan seconds of it, and continues through right again within 10 seconds.
the rest of the tracks the same way.
If you don’t, the system advances to
SCAN ICON Disc Scan the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
Features
of it, and continues through the rest
of the discs the same way. When the
SCAN ICON system reaches the last disc, DISC
SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays
normally.
When you press the SCAN button or

scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the first track of
the current disc plays for about 10 When you press and hold the SCAN
seconds. You will see SCAN next to button until you hear a beep or scroll
TRACK on the screen. To hear the down and push the interface selector
rest of the track, press the SCAN to the right, the first track of the
button or push the interface selector current disc plays for about 10
191
Playing Discs
Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play
REPEAT ICON REPEAT ICON RANDOM ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT ICON TRACK RANDOM ICON
To replay the current track To replay the current disc To play the tracks of the current disc
continuously, use the interface continuously, use the interface in random order, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select selector to scroll down, select DISC selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER REPEAT, and press ENTER on the TRACK RANDOM, and press
on the interface selector. As a interface selector. As a reminder, ENTER on the interface selector. As
reminder, you will see REPEAT next you will see REPEAT next to DISC a reminder, you will see RANDOM
to TRACK on the screen. To turn on the screen. To turn this feature next to TRACK on the screen. To
this feature off, highlight TRACK off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not turn this feature off, highlight
REPEAT (if not already highlighted), already highlighted), and press TRACK RANDOM (if not already
and press ENTER on the interface ENTER on the interface selector highlighted), and press ENTER on
selector again. again. the interface selector again.
192
Playing Discs
To Stop Playing a Disc Playing an MP3 Disc

To take the system out of disc mode, The changer plays MP3 discs in
press the AM/FM button (AM or recorded order. Maximum playable CURRENT FOLDER
FM button on Canadian, Alaskan, file layers are 8, and total playable
and Hawaiian models) or press the tracks are 255. If your disc has a
button (U.S. models). To complex structure, the changer
return to disc mode, press the DISC takes some time to read the disc
button. before beginning play.
Features
If you turn the system off while a To play an MP3 disc, use the disc
disc is playing, either with the controls previously described, along
power/volume knob or the ignition with the following information.
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on. To enter the FOLDER LIST, press
ENTER on the selector, select a
Playing a DVD-A Disc folder by turning the interface knob,
Use the disc controls previously then press ENTER on the selector. If
described. you want to move to the parent
folder, push the selector up. If there
are no folder names, ‘‘No Title’’ is
displayed. You will see the current
folder highlighted.
193
Playing Discs
Folder Repeat Folder Random

FOLDER REPEAT ICON FOLDER RANDOM ICON
FORDER REPEAT ICON FOLDER RANDOM ICON
To replay the current folder To play the tracks of the current

continuously, use the interface folder in random order, use the
selector to scroll down, select interface selector to scroll down,
FOLDER REPEAT with the select FOLDER RANDOM with the
interface knob, and press ENTER on interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. As a reminder, the interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see FOLDER REPEAT next you will see FOLDER RANDOM
to the disc number on the screen. To next to the disc number on the
turn this feature off, highlight screen. To turn this feature off,
FOLDER REPEAT (if not already highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not
highlighted), and press ENTER on already highlighted), and press
the selector again. ENTER on the selector again.
194
Playing Discs
Removing Discs from the To remove a different disc from the

Changer changer, first select it by pressing
To remove the disc that is currently the corresponding number on the
playing, press the eject button. You preset button or turning the
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the upper display. interface knob, and pressing ENTER
When you remove the disc from the on the interface selector. When that
slot, the system automatically enters disc begins playing, press the eject
the previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, button.
Features
or XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models
except Alaskan and Hawaiian)]. The When you press the eject button
system also begins the load while listening to the radio, or with
sequence so you can load another the audio system turned off, the disc
disc. If you do not load another disc, that was last selected is ejected.
the load sequence is cancelled, and After that disc is ejected, pressing
the system continues playing in the the eject button again will eject the
previous mode. next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
If you do not remove the disc from all the discs from the changer.
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds and put the You can also eject discs when the
disc changer in pause mode. To ignition switch is off:
begin playing the disc, press the disc To eject one disc, press and release
button. the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
195
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 mm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
Handle your discs properly to recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping. causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.
196
Disc Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a disc, find the Error Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the disc eject button, and remove the
your vehicle to your dealer. disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
FOCUS Error the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
Features
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be remove, consult your
dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
197
Remote Audio Controls
Remote Audio Controls The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, the system
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top
the desired volume is reached, then (＋) of the CH button. Press the
release it. bottom (−) to return to the
MODE beginning of the current track. Press
BUTTON
The MODE button changes the it again to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
VOL repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the upper display.
BUTTON
CH XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models
BUTTON except Alaskan and Hawaiian), or a
disc (if a disc is loaded).
If you are listening to the radio, use

Three controls for the audio system the CH button to change stations.
are mounted in the steering wheel Each time you press the top (＋) of
hub. These let you control basic the button, the system goes to the
functions without removing your next preset station on the band you
hand from the wheel. are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
198
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will If your vehicle’s battery is discon- must display ‘‘ ’’, then turn
disable itself if it is disconnected nected or goes dead, or the radio the radio off. Push and hold the
from electrical power for any reason. fuse is removed, the audio system preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then
To make it work again, you must will disable itself. If this happens, push the POWER/VOLUME knob.
enter a specific five-digit code with you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the upper The serial number will appear in two
the preset buttons. Because there display the next time you turn on the sets of four digits.
are hundreds of number system. Use the preset buttons to
combinations possible from the five enter the five-digit code. The code is The system will retain your A/M and
Features
digits, making the system work located on the radio code card F/M presets even if power is
without knowing the exact code is included in your owner’s manual kit. disconnected.
nearly impossible. When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number If you make a mistake entering the
and serial number. It is best to store code, do not start over; complete the
this card in a safe place at home. In five-digit sequence, then enter the
addition, you should write the audio correct code. You have ten tries to
system’s serial number in this owner’s enter the correct code. If you are
manual. unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
If you lose the card, you must obtain hour before trying again.
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio If the code card is lost, your dealer
system’s serial number. can access your code with your
radio’s serial number. To access the
serial number, turn the radio on. It
199
Security System
The security system helps to protect With the system set, you can still
your vehicle and valuables from theft. open the trunk with the remote
The horn sounds and a combination without triggering the alarm. The
of headlights, position/side marker alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
lights, and taillights flash if someone forced, or the trunk is opened with
attempts to break into your vehicle the trunk release button on the
or remove the radio. This alarm driver’s door or the emergency trunk
continues for 2 minutes, then the opener.
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the 2 minutes have The security system will not set if
elapsed, unlock either front door the hood, trunk, or any door is not
with the remote or the built-in key. SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
The security system automatically Once the security system is set, monitor on the instrument panel (see
sets 15 seconds after you lock the opening any door or the hood page 13 ) to see if the doors and
doors, close the hood, and close the without using the built-in key or the trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
trunk. For the system to activate, remote will cause it to sound. It also part of the monitor display, manually
you must lock the doors from the sounds if the radio is removed from check the hood.
outside with the remote, built-in key, the dashboard or the audio system
lock tab, or door lock switch. The wiring is cut. Do not attempt to alter this system
security system indicator on the or add other devices to it.
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
200
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) SET button on the steering wheel.
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL icon
accelerator pedal. It should be used RES/ appears on the multi-information
for cruising on straight, open ACCEL display to show the system is now
highways. It is not recommended for BUTTON activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. When cruise control is on while
Features
driving, the SH-AWD torque
distribution monitor and the tire
pressure monitor are not shown
Improper use of the cruise on the multi-information display.
control can lead to a crash. DECEL/SET BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED
201
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your speed increases speed in any of these ways:
going down a hill, use the brakes to Press and hold the DECEL/SET
slow down. This cancels cruise Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when
control. To resume the set speed, button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed.
press the RES/ACCEL button. The desired cruising speed, release the
CRUISE CONTROL icon on the button. To slow down in very small
multi-information display will come amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
back on. Push on the accelerator pedal. button. Each time you do this,
Accelerate to the desired cruising your vehicle slows down about 1
When climbing a steep hill, the speed, and press the DECEL/SET mph (1.6 km/h).
automatic transmission may button.
downshift to hold the set speed. Tap the brake pedal lightly with
To increase your speed in very your foot. The CRUISE
small amounts, tap the RES/ CONTROL indicator on the
ACCEL button. Each time you do instrument panel will go out.
this, the vehicle speeds up about 1 When the vehicle slows to the
mph (1.6 km/h). desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
202
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control on, you can Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
still use the accelerator pedal to When you push the CANCEL button
speed up for passing. After CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Features
causes cruise control to cancel. comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns

CANCEL BUTTON the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button.
203
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal They do not have the safety feature For quick and accurate training,
Transceiver built into your vehicle that causes the motor to stop and make sure the remote control
can be programmed to operate up to reverse if an obstacle is detected transmitter for the device (garage
three remote controlled devices during closing, increasing the risk of door, automatic gate, security
around your home, such as garage injury. system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
doors, lighting, or home security
systems. HomeLink is a registered Training HomeLink
trademark of Johnson ControlsTM. Before you begin − If you just
General Information received your vehicle and have not
If you are training HomeLink to Important Safety Precautions trained any of the buttons in
operate a garage door or gate, you Always refer to the operating HomeLink before, you should erase
should unplug the motor for that instructions and safety information any previously learned codes before
device during training. Repeatedly that came with your garage door training the first button.
pressing the remote control button opener or other equipment you
could burn out the motor. intend to operate with HomeLink. If To do this, press and hold the front
you do not have this information, and rear buttons on HomeLink for
The HomeLink transceiver stores contact the manufacturer of the about 20 seconds, or until the red
the code in a permanent memory. equipment. indicator flashes. Release the
There should be no need to retrain buttons, then go to step 1.
the transmitter if your vehicle’s
battery goes dead or is disconnected. If you are training the second or
If your garage door opener was third buttons, go directly to step 1.
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it.
204
If the red indicator in HomeLink 5. Plug in the garage door opener

RED begins to flash slowly at first, motor, then test the HomeLink
INDICATOR
then rapidly, release both button by pushing it for about 1
buttons, and go to step 5. second.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does If the button works,
not flash rapidly), your remote programming is complete.
transmitter may stop
Features
transmitting after a short time. If the button does not work go
Go to step 4. to step 6.
4. Press and hold the remote 6. Push and hold the HomeLink
transmitter button and one of the button for a few seconds, then
1. Unplug the garage door opener HomeLink buttons at the same watch the red indicator on
motor from the electrical outlet. time. While continuing to hold the HomeLink.
HomeLink button, press and
2. Hold the end of the garage door release the remote transmitter If the indicator stays on or
opener remote 2 to 5 inches from button every 2 seconds. flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
HomeLink. Make sure you are not If the red indicator in HomeLink thru 5.
blocking your view of the red begins to flash slowly at first,
indicator in HomeLink. then rapidly, release both If the indicator flashes rapidly
buttons, and go to step 5. for 2 seconds then stays on, you
3. Press and hold the remote If the red indicator in HomeLink have a rolling code transmitter.
transmitter button and one of the continues to flash slowly (does Go ‘‘Training with a Rolling
HomeLink buttons at the same not begin to flash rapidly), Code System’’ (see page 206).
time. repeat steps 2 thru 4. CONTINUED
205
7. Repeat these steps to train the 1. Make sure you have properly You then have about 30 seconds to
other two HomeLink buttons to completed the ‘‘training complete the following steps.
operate any other compatible HomeLink’’ procedure.
remotely controlled devices 4. Press and hold the button
around your home (lighting, 2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your programmed during the ‘‘Training
automatic gate, security system, garage door opener unit. The HomeLink’’ procedure for 3 to 4
etc.). location will vary, depending on seconds.
the manufacturer.
Training With a Rolling Code 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
System TRAINING BUTTON button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage This should turn off the training
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ indicator on the garage door
or variable code. Information from opener unit. (Some systems may
the remote control and the garage require you to press the button up
door opener are needed before to three times.)
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener. 6. Press the programmed HomeLink
button again. It should operate the
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ garage door.
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on, then release it. The indicator
may blink, or come on and stay on.
206
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the front and stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
rear buttons until the red indicator following two conditions: (1) This device
begins to flash, then release the 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired
Features
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
205 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by the This device complies with Industry
1. Press and hold the HomeLink transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
button to be trained until the the Internet, go to www.homelink. Operation is subject to the following two
HomeLink indicator begins to com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
flash slowly. interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
207
AcuraLink
AcuraLink enhances your ownership Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left,
experience by providing a direct Most AcuraLink functions are right, up, down, and in. Use the
communication link between your controlled by the interface dial. The selector to scroll through lists, to
vehicle and the Acura Server. interface dial has two parts, a knob select menus, and to highlight menu
Working through the XM radio and a selector. items. When you make a selection,
satellite, AcuraLink works in push the center of the selector
conjunction with the navigation KNOB (ENTER) to go to that selection.
system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and ENTER
audio system in your vehicle. It
displays and receives several kinds
of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on

your vehicle’s features.
Important recall and safety

information. SELECTOR
Maintenance information to keep The knob turns left and right. Use it
your vehicle in top condition. to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.
208
AcuraLink
Reading Messages Select Message to display the Unread messages have a closed
If you have a new message, an Select a message category screen. envelope icon next to them. The icon
envelope icon appears in the top Then, select ALL MESSAGES. disappears when it has already been
right corner of the navigation screen. read.
NOTE: Only diagnostic info

messages appear while driving. They
indicate if your vehicle has a
Features
problem that may need immediate
attention (see page 215 ).
After purchasing your vehicle,

messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
Scroll up or down, and select the receive messages. This can take
To open a message: message you want to read by several days to process.
pressing ENTER on the interface
Press ENTER on the interface selector.
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map To view previously read messages,
menu. If there is more than one press the INFO button, then select
new message, you will see a list of MESSAGES.
message titles.
209
AcuraLink
Deleting Messages To delete all messages: Message Options

NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/ NOTE: The Delete All Messages
campaign messages can only be command only works for quick tip
deleted by your dealer. and maintenance minder messages.
Other messages must be deleted
To delete a single message: individually.
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen. Press the SETUP button to view
the setup screen.
Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER Select MORE by pushing the
on the interface selector. interface selector to the right.
Use the interface knob to scroll up Use the interface knob to scroll to
or down to the message title you the AcuraLink/Messages button, When you open a message, you can
want to delete, and select it by and select it by pressing ENTER read a summary of it, and then
pressing ENTER on the interface on the interface selector. choose one of several options. If an
selector. option is not available for a message,
Scroll to the Delete Messages that button will not be highlighted.
Scroll to Delete with the interface option, and select it by pressing
knob, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
210
AcuraLink
Delete − Select this button to Call Your Acura Dealer − Select Message Preferences
delete the current message. this button to call the Acura dealer To set your AcuraLink preferences
you purchased your vehicle from. (the types of messages you want to
Voice − Select this button to hear a AcuraLink also directs you to this receive, if any), visit the Owner Link
voice read the entire message. This dealer so you can schedule a website at www.owners.acura.com,
gives you more information than the maintenance appointment or receive and choose what you would like to
screen can display at one time. When information about a message. If you receive. If you do not have internet
you select the Voice button, it visit another dealer for service two access, call Acura Client Services at
Features
changes to a Stop Reading button. times within a 14-month period, (800) 382-2238; they can set your
Select the button again to stop the AcuraLink will reset to call that message preferences for you.
voice. dealer.
Call − Select this button to call a More Info − Select this button to
phone number embedded in the get more information about the
message. When you select Call, the current diagnostic message. To use
HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the this option, your cell phone must be
number for you. linked to the HFL and have a
To make a call, your Bluetooth compatible data service available.
compatible phone must be paired to Access the Owner Link website to
your vehicle’s HandsFreeLink (see find out which data services are
page 235 ). currently compatible with AcuraLink.
Find Nearest Acura Dealer −

Select this button to find the nearest
Acura dealer using the navigation
system.
211
AcuraLink
AcuraLink/Message Screen To access the following functions, Auto Reading − Select ON to have
press the SETUP button, push the the system automatically read each
interface dial to the right to select message to you. Select OFF to
MORE, then rotate the interface dial manually select the Voice button
to select AcuraLink/Messages. when you want a message read to
you.
Delete Messages − Select this
button to delete all stored messages Phone-Data Connection − Select
within a category, except for this button to begin the process
diagnostic info and recall campaign required to connect to Acura. This is
messages. These messages can only used to access the most recent
be deleted by a certified technician diagnostic information when a
after the recall or problem is done or problem occurs.
corrected, or through a broadcast
message from Acura. NOTE: For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
New Message Notification − need a Bluetooth compatible and
Select ON if you want to be notified enabled cell phone paired to the
of new messages (envelope icon HandsFreeLink (HFL), and a
appears on the navigation screen). compatible data service (see Pairing
Select OFF if you do not want to be Your Phone on page 235 ).
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the
navigation screen).
212
AcuraLink
Message Categories Quick Tips Feature Guide

There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guides, Maintenance Minders,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Dealer Appointment Reminders.
The system can store up to 256
messages.
Features
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
These messages, based on updated During the first 90 days of

vehicle information and comments ownership, one of 32 different
from other RL owners, supplement messages appears each day. These
your Owner’s Manual and Quick messages help you to use and
Start Guide. They provide you with understand the technological
relevant information for a safe and features of your vehicle.
enjoyable ownership experience. For
additional information, call Acura
Client Services directly through the
HFL.
213
AcuraLink
Maintenance Minder You can then use the message Recall/Campaigns

options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
These messages provide detailed If your vehicle is affected by a recall

information about the service or other important safety
needed for your vehicle. When a information, a letter will be mailed to
maintenance message appears on you about the issue and how to fix it.
the multi-information display, a list of If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,
needed maintenance items also you will also receive a reminder
appears in an AcuraLink message. message through AcuraLink. You
These messages tell you the exact can then use the message options to
maintenance needed, helping you to call your dealer for an appointment
avoid unnecessary maintenance or to find the nearest dealer.
costs.
214
AcuraLink
Diagnostic Info Depending on the severity of the

If an instrument panel indicator stays problem, the message will let you
on when it should go off, or a know if you should see your dealer
message appears on the multi- immediately or if you can wait a
information display, AcuraLink can while.
identify the problem, send the
information to Acura for analysis,
and then provide you with the most
Features
accurate repair information available-
all before going to a dealer. This
helps you handle the problem as it
occurs, preventing or limiting costly
repairs.
When an instrument panel indicator
The AcuraLink system cannot comes on, AcuraLink immediately
determine some mechanical notifies you with the message,
problems (such as squeaks or ‘‘Check more information.’’ If you do
rattles) that are not triggered by the not want the information right away,
diagnostic indicator monitors. select the Check Later option. If you You will see information from the
want the information now, select the onboard troubleshooting database.
A diagnostic message is generated if Check Now option. (If the navigation
any of the instrument panel screen is not active, you must select You can then use message options to
indicators stay on when they should OK from the navigation disclaimer call your dealer for an appointment,
go off. For more information on the screen before you can check the find the nearest dealer, or find out
instrument panel indicators, see page information.) more information about the issue.
59 . CONTINUED
215
AcuraLink
When you select the More Info Dealer Appointment Reminder

option, if the HFL is connected to a
cellular data service, AcuraLink
gathers more information about the
problem, and sends it to Acura.
There, the information is analyzed
and returned to the vehicle with the
most accurate repair information.
When you make an appointment

through the Owner’s Link Online
Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded about that appointment
through the AcuraLink two days in
advance. If you need to reschedule,
you can call your dealer directly with
the HFL.
The timing of your reminder is

based on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.
216
OnStar
U.S. models only The Directions and Connections OnStar Control Panel
The OnStar system in your vehicle Plan provides these additional
SYSTEM VOICE
gives you access to a wide range of features: ACTIVATED
services and information with the Route Support STATUS
INDICATOR KEY PAD
touch of a button. An OnStar advisor Ride Assist BUTTON
is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a Information and Convenience
week. Services
Features
The Safe and Sound Plan provides
these features:
CALL ANSWER/ EMERGENCY
Roadside Assistance BUTTON
CALL END
Emergency Services (WHITE PHONE) OnStar SERVICES
Automatic Notification of Airbag BUTTON BUTTON
Deployment
Accident Assistance The OnStar buttons and indicator
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking are located on the ceiling near the
Stolen Vehicle Tracking front ceiling light.
Misplaced Vehicle Assistance
Online Concierge Services
217
OnStar
OnStar Services Button To cancel the retry, press the white To record a message:
phone button. During your call to the advisor or
Press this button to contact an virtual advisor, press and release
OnStar advisor. You will hear a A microphone is located in the base the OnStar button. The system
chime, followed by the of the OnStar control panel so you beeps to indicate that it is
announcement, ‘‘Connecting to can speak to the advisor without recording.
OnStar.’’ The connection should take taking your hands off the steering When you are finished recording,
about 15 seconds. The advisor will wheel or diverting your attention press and release the OnStar
assist you with any of the services from the road. The OnStar advisor’s button again. The system beeps
included in your plan. voice comes from the audio system’s and stops recording.
speakers. Use the volume control on
Depending on which service you the audio system or on the steering To hear the first playback of a
request, you may need to give your wheel to adjust the volume. message:
Personal Identification Number Press the white phone button. The
(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a Recording an Advisor or Virtual system responds with ‘‘OnStar
number you make up and provide Advisor Message ready.’’
when you establish your OnStar You can record up to 5 minutes of Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The
service. information from your OnStar recorded message is played
advisor or the virtual advisor. This is through the audio system
If cellular telephone service is not helpful for reviewing the route, hotel, speakers.
available in the area you are driving or restaurant information you When you are finished listening,
in, you will hear a fast busy signal. receive from the OnStar center. press the white phone button. The
The system will retry the connection system responds with ‘‘Goodbye.’’
several times before returning to the
ready mode.
218
OnStar
To hear a message again: The advisor will ask about the nature Voice Activated Keypad
Press the white phone button. The of the emergency, locate your Button
system responds with ‘‘OnStar vehicle, and notify the appropriate Press this button to send dial tones
ready.’’ emergency service agencies. while communicating with an
Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The automated phone system during an
system responds with ‘‘Play or If you press this button accidentally, OnStar personal call (see page 224 ).
Resume.’’ do not cancel the call. Wait until the
If you say ‘‘Play,’’ the message OnStar advisor answers, then explain
Features
plays from the beginning. If you your mistake.
say ‘‘Resume,’’ the message plays
from the point you previously Call Answer/Call End
stopped it. Button
Press this white phone button to end
Recording a new message will delete a call to the OnStar advisor. If the
the previous message. OnStar center calls you, press this
button to answer the call.
Emergency Button
This button is also used to initiate
Press this button to contact an the Personal Calling and Virtual
OnStar advisor only if you have an Advisor services, if you have
emergency situation. You will hear a subscribed.
tone, followed by the announcement,
‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’
Your call is given highest priority.
219
OnStar
System Status Indicator Safe and Sound Plan Features Automatic Notification of Airbag
This indicator shows you the status The OnStar system uses the global Deployment − If you are ever in an
of the system. positioning system (GPS) to locate accident that causes the airbags to
your vehicle whenever you place a deploy, the OnStar system
Solid Green − The system is ready call. This allows the advisor to automatically places a call (provided
for use. quickly contact the nearest services the OnStar system and your vehicle’s
without requiring you to provide electrical system are still intact). The
Blinking Green − A call is in detailed directions. advisor will attempt to speak to you
progress. to evaluate the situation, and contact
Roadside Assistance − Contact the nearest emergency services
Solid Red − There is a problem the OnStar advisor if you need provider.
with the system. Press the OnStar assistance with a problem (flat tire,
button to contact an advisor. If the out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The Accident Assistance − The
call connects, the advisor will assist advisor will contact an appropriate OnStar advisor can help you if you
you with verifying the system’s agency to come and assist you. are ever in a minor accident by
operation. If you are not able to asking you for information about the
contact an advisor, take your vehicle Emergency Services − Contact an accident. Complete, detailed
to an Acura dealer to have the OnStar advisor if you have an information will make it easier to
system diagnosed. emergency situation. The advisor complete accident reports and
will contact the nearest emergency insurance claims.
Blinking Red − There is a problem services provider (ambulance, fire
with the system while a call is in department, etc.) and advise them of
progress. your situation.
220
OnStar
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking Misplaced Vehicle Assistance − Directions and Connections Plan
− By sending a signal to your If you are unable to locate your Features
vehicle, the advisor can lock or vehicle in a large parking lot or The Directions and Connections
unlock your vehicle’s doors. This is parking structure, contact OnStar at Plan provides these additional
helpful if you are away from your (888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will features:
vehicle and realize you forgot to lock remotely activate the exterior lights
the doors, or if you have locked the and the horn, allowing you to locate Route Support − The OnStar
remote or built-in key in your vehicle. your vehicle. advisor can give you verbal
Features
To get OnStar’s assistance, call directions from your current location
(888) 4-ONSTAR (466-7827). Online Concierge Services − to a desired destination.
From your computer, you can log
Stolen Vehicle Tracking − Using into www. myonstar.com to make Ride Assist − If you need a ride
GPS, OnStar can locate your vehicle dinner reservations, purchase tickets (taxi, limousine service, etc.) the
almost anywhere. If your vehicle is to events, send flowers, etc. OnStar advisor can make the
ever stolen, contact OnStar at arrangements for you. Use the
(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will OnStar button, or call
put you in contact with the proper (888) 4-ONSTAR.
authorities, and assist them with
locating your vehicle. Information and Convenience
Services − The OnStar advisor can
give you information on nearby
hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,
gas stations, and many other
services in any area you are traveling.
The advisor can also help you with
hotel or restaurant reservations.
221
OnStar
Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call − You If you make a mistake speaking the
The OnStar Personal Calling plan is must use voice commands to give phone number, or the system
an extra-cost option that gives you the OnStar system your calling responds with the wrong number,
the ability to use your vehicle’s information. To make a phone call: say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the
OnStar system as a hands-free system to erase the number.
cellular telephone. Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
To sign up for Personal Calling, ready.’’
press the OnStar button in your Say ‘‘Dial.’’
vehicle, and notify the advisor that OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone
you’d like to sign up. The advisor will number to dial, please.’’
get all the information needed to set Say the entire number without
up your account, and provide you pausing.
with your new cellular telephone OnStar will repeat the number.
number. Say ‘‘Yes’’ to dial the number, or
You will need to provide a credit card say ‘‘No’’ to try again.
number, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ or OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’
minutes of air time (one unit equals and then repeat the complete
1 minute). telephone number. It will then
place the telephone call.
When you have finished your
conversation, press the white
phone button to hang up.
222
OnStar
You can also enter the number one OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’ If you need to cancel the phone call
digit at a time. To make a phone call: and then repeat the complete attempt before entering the
telephone number. It will then complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’
Press the white phone button. place the telephone call. The system will cancel the operation
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar When you have finished your and return to Ready.
ready.’’ conversation, press the white
Say ‘‘Digit dial.’’ phone button again to hang up. If the system has difficulty
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First understanding a voice command, it
Features
digit to dial, please.’’ If you make a mistake speaking a can respond with:
Say the first digit of the number. digit of the phone number, or the
OnStar will repeat that digit. system responds with the wrong ‘‘Pardon’’ − The system could not
Always wait for OnStar to confirm digit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the match your voice command to one it
the digit before going to the next system to erase the last digit. knows. Repeat the command
digit. distinctly.
Say the second digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit. ‘‘Slower please’’ − The system
Continue this until you have given missed the command because it was
OnStar the complete telephone not ready for it, or there was too
number. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’ much background noise. Repeat the
command after a short pause.
223
OnStar
Voice Activated Key Pad − This Incoming Telephone Calls − Using Name Tags
feature allows you to access most When someone places a telephone The OnStar system can store up to
voicemail systems and respond to call to you, the audio system will twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in
number requests from computer mute and you will hear the ring. its memory. When you store these
systems, such as ‘‘Press 1 for sales; Press the white phone button to numbers in its memory, you give
press 2 for service.’’ To use the voice answer the call. When you have each one a name tag. When you want
activated keypad during a call, do completed the call, press the white to place a telephone call, you can
this: phone button again to hang up. recall the number by giving the
While in a personal call, press the system the name tag.
Voice Activated Key Pad ( )
button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
digit to send please.’’
Say the first digit of the number
you want to send.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Always wait for OnStar to confirm
the digit before going to the next
digit.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the second digit of the number.
Continue this until you have given
OnStar the complete number.
Then say ‘‘Send.’’ OnStar will send
the number by dial tones.
224
OnStar
Storing a Name Tag − To store a You can also store a telephone

telephone number and its name tag number and its name tag one digit at
in the system, do this: a time. To store them in the system:
Press the white phone button. Press the white phone button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar OnStar will respond with ‘‘ready.’’
ready.’’ Say ‘‘Digit store.’’
Say ‘‘Store.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone digit to store, please.’’
Features
number to store, please.’’ Say the first digit of the number.
Say the entire number. OnStar will repeat that digit.
OnStar will repeat the number, Say the second digit of the number.
and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’ OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say ‘‘Yes,’’ or say ‘‘No’’ to try again. Continue this until you have given
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name OnStar the complete telephone
tag, please.’’ number. Then say ‘‘Store.’’
Say the name that you want OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
assigned to that telephone number. tag, please.’’
Say the name that you want
assigned to that telephone number.
225
OnStar
Placing a Telephone Call − To Deleting a Name Tag − To delete Say ‘‘Redial.’’

place a telephone call using a name a name tag and telephone number OnStar will respond with
tag, do this: from memory, do this: ‘‘Redialing,’’ then place the
telephone call.
Press the white phone button. Press the Call Answer or Call End
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar button. Security Code
ready.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar By giving the system a security code
Say ‘‘Call.’’ ready.’’ that you make up, you can lock out
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name Say ‘‘Delete.’’ the personal calling and virtual
tag, please.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name advisor capabilities of the system so
Say the name tag for the number tag, please.’’ unauthorized people cannot make
you want to call. Say the name tag for the number telephone calls. To turn security on
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling you want to delete. or off, do this:
＜name tag＞,’’ then place the OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete
telephone call. ＜name tag＞, yes or no.’’ Press the white phone button.
Say ‘‘Yes.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
If you have forgotten what name OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting ready.’’
tags you have stored, the system will ＜name tag＞.’’ Say ‘‘Security.’’
read them to you. Press the white OnStar will respond with ‘‘First
phone button. When the system Redialing a Number − To redial digit of security code, please.’’
responds with ‘‘OnStar ready,’’ say the last telephone number you Say the first digit of the code.
‘‘Directory.’’ The system will then called:
repeat all stored name tags. Press the Call Answer or Call End
button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’
226
OnStar
OnStar will repeat that digit. Keeping Track of Units Adding Units − To purchase more
Say the second digit of the code. You must prepurchase units units of cellular air time, do this:
OnStar will repeat that digit. (minutes) of cellular air time. The
Say the third digit of the code. OnStar system tracks how many Press the white phone button.
OnStar will repeat that digit. units you have remaining. OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
Say the fourth digit of the code. ready.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Security To find out how many units you have Say ‘‘Units.’’
is ON/OFF.’’ remaining, do this: OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify
Features
or add.’’
If you forget the security code Press the white phone button. Say ‘‘Add.’’
entered, or someone else enters a OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar OnStar will connect you to an
security code unknown to you, you ready.’’ automated system to handle your
must contact an OnStar advisor to Say ‘‘Units.’’ purchase.
reset the code. Press the OnStar OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify It is also possible to press the
button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR. or add.’’ Onstar button and talk to an
Say ‘‘Verify.’’ advisor to purchase more air time.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘You
have ＜number＞ units remaining.’’ You can also call OnStar at
(888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information
about your account at the OnStar
web site, www.onstar.com.
227
OnStar
OnStar Virtual Advisor If you do not have Internet access, a Personal Identification Number
When you subscribe to personal default profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your
calling, you can also enjoy the personal identification number (PIN)
benefits of virtual advisor. This To use the virtual advisor from your when you establish your account
feature lets you hear information in vehicle, do this: with OnStar. You should write down
your vehicle about weather, sports, your PIN, and keep it with you at all
news, and stocks. It is even possible Press the white phone button. times.
to have your e-mail read to you. OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
ready.’’ You can change your PIN at any time.
Although virtual advisor can provide Say ‘‘virtual advisor.’’ Contact the OnStar advisor by
information on many subjects, you pressing the OnStar button, or by
can set up a customized profile with The system will connect you to the calling (888) 4-ONSTAR.
OnStar that makes it easier to get virtual advisor. The virtual advisor
information about areas that are of will prompt you for the information If you forget your PIN, contact the
specific interest to you. To do this, you desire. OnStar advisor. For security reasons,
you must go to the OnStar web site, your PIN will be mailed to you.
www.onstar.com. This is a secure If you would like to hear a list of
site; you will need your account voice commands that are available,
number and PIN to access your say ‘‘What are my choices.’’ OnStar
account information and to design is continually upgrading the system,
your customized profile. so new commands become available.
228
OnStar
System Limitations roof antenna with cargo or bicycles As required by the FCC: This device
OnStar uses the global positioning on a roof rack. complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
system (GPS) to locate your vehicle Operation is subject to the following two
for functions such as route guidance When you turn off your vehicle’s conditions: (1) This device may not
and roadside assistance. GPS is ignition, OnStar goes into low-power cause harmful interference, and (2) this
affected by structures that can mode. After 48 hours, it switches to device must accept any interference
obstruct the signal, such as tunnels, sleep mode to conserve your vehicle’s received, including interference that
parking structures, and tall buildings. battery power. Features such as may cause undesired operation.
Features
It may not be possible for OnStar to remote door unlocking and
pinpoint your location if you are in or misplaced vehicle assistance will not Changes or modifications not expressly
near such structures. work after your vehicle has been approved by the party responsible for
parked for more than 48 hours. compliance could void the user’s
OnStar uses cellular technology to authority to operate the equipment.
communicate with your vehicle. OnStar is a registered trademark of
Cellular coverage varies by location, the OnStar Corporation. This device complies with Industry
which may affect the ability to Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
establish a connection, or the quality subject to the following two conditions:
of the connection. (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
Onstar has antennas in the rear accept any interference that may cause
window (on each side of the high- undesired operation of the device.
mount brake light) and on the roof
near the high-mount brake light. To
avoid reception problems, do not
cover the window antennas with
metal stickers, and do not cover the
229
HandsFreeLinkTM
Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Incoming/Outgoing Calls
HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth is a registered trademark With a linked phone, the HFL allows
Bluetooth technology as a wireless of Bluetooh SIG, Inc. you to send and receive calls in your
link between it and your Bluetooth Bluetooth is the wireless technology vehicle without holding the phone.
compatible cell phone. When you are that links your phone to the HFL.
in your vehicle and your phone is The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth, Phonebook
linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy which means the maximum range The HFL can store up to 50 names
hands-free phone use. The HFL is between your phone and vehicle is and phone numbers in its phonebook.
available in both English and French 30 feet (10 meters). With a linked phone, you can then
(Canadian models only). To change automatically dial any name or
the language, see page 244 . To use the HFL, your phone must number in the phonebook.
have approved Bluetooth capability
Here are the main features of the along with the Hands Free Profile. Here are the main components of
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL This type of phone is available the HFL system:
begin on page 233 . through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an Microphone
Voice Control approved phone by visiting The HFL microphone is on the
HFL recognizes simple voice www.acura.com. ( In Canada, visit ceiling console. The microphone is
commands, such as phone numbers www.acura.ca.) or by calling the Hands shared with the navigation system.
and names. It uses these commands Free Link customer support at
to automatically dial, receive, and (888) 528-7876.
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 233 .
230
HandsFreeLinkTM
Audio System HFL Buttons Here is the function of each HFL

When the HFL is in use, the sound button:
comes through the vehicle’s front HFL TALK
audio system speakers. If the audio BUTTON HFL Talk: This button is used before
system is in use while making a call, you give a command, to answer
the HFL over-rides the audio system. HFL BACK incoming calls, and to confirm
To change the volume level, use the BUTTON system information.
audio system volume knob.
Features
HFL Back: This button is used to
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
VOICE CONTROL cancel an operation.
BUTTONS
To operate the HFL, use the HFL

Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. Below the
HFL buttons is another set of voice
control buttons for the navigation,
climate control, and audio systems.
231
HandsFreeLinkTM
Multi-Information Display Signal Strength＊ − Indicates the HFL Mode − Indicates when you
network signal strength of the are dialing and receiving calls.
SIGNAL HFL BATTERY current phone call. Five bars
STRENGTH MODE LEVEL STATUS equals full strength. Phone Dialing − Indicates the
number you entered or the
ROAM Status＊ − Indicates your number of the incoming call.
phone is roaming.
＊ : Some phones do not send this
Battery Level Status＊ − Indicates information to the HFL.
the power remaining in your
phone’s current battery charge.
Five bars equals full battery
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING strength.
When you are operating the HFL, or

when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you
will see this information on the
screen:
232
HandsFreeLinkTM
How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control To hear a list of available options
The HFL is operated by the HFL Here are some guidelines for using at any time, press the Talk button,
Talk and Back buttons on the left voice control: wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
side of the steering wheel. The next To enter a command, press the free link help.’’
few pages provide instructions for all Talk button. Then, after the beep,
basic features of the HFL. say your command in a clear, Many commands can be spoken
natural tone. together. For example, you can
NOTE: All phones may not say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
Features
operate identically, and some may For best system operation, set the
cause inconsistent operation of the climate control fan speed to low, To enter a string of numbers in a
HFL. and direct the center vents away Call or Dial command, you can say
from the microphone in the ceiling. them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
If the HFL does not recognize a 10, or 11.
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the To skip a voice prompt, press the
command a second time, its Talk button while the HFL is
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it speaking. The HFL will then begin
doesn’t recognize the command a listening for your next command.
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
233
HandsFreeLinkTM
To go back one step in a command When you finish a command Setting Up the System
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press sequence, the HFL goes back to The voice of the HFL can be set to
the Back button. its main menu. For example, when male or female (U.S. models only).
If nothing is said while the HFL is you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the Also, the incoming notification can
listening for a command, the HFL HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
will time out and stop its voice stored.’’ The next time you press notification.
recognition. The next time you the Talk button, you will be at the
press the Talk button, the HFL main menu. To set up the system, do this:
begins listening from the point at 1. Press and release the Talk button.
which it timed out. After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
To end a command sequence at are setup and clear.’’
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press the Talk button, 2. Press and release the Talk button.
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
The next time you press the Talk HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
button, the HFL begins from its male or female prompts?’’
main menu.
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’
234
HandsFreeLinkTM
4. Press and release the Talk button. Pairing Your Phone NOTE:
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the Your Bluetooth compatible phone HFL does not allow you to pair
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like with HandsFree Profile must be your phone if the vehicle is
a ring tone or a prompt?’’ If you paired to the HFL before you can moving.
say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFL make and receive hands-free call. For pairing, your phone must be in
returns to its main menu. Saying its Discovery mode.
‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone or Up to six phones can be paired to
prompt playback during an the HFL.
Features
incoming call. The audio system The following procedure works for
will still mute, and a message will most phones. If you cannot pair
be displayed. your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
5. Press and release the Talk button. operating manual, talk to your
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or phone retailer, or call the
‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring HandsFreeLink customer support
tone’’ you will hear a ring tone at (888) 528-7876.
through the audio speakers to During the pairing process, turn
announce an incoming call. If you off any previously paired phones
choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hear before pairing a new phone.
this message to announce an
incoming call: ‘‘You have an
incoming call.’’
CONTINUED
235
HandsFreeLinkTM
1. With your phone on and the 4. Press and release the Talk button. 7. Press and release the Talk button.
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the name you
ON (II) position, press and release HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a want to use. For example, say
the Talk button. After the beep, Bluetooth phone.’’ ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFL is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
response is ‘‘Phone set up options NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a successfully paired. Returning to
are status, pair, edit, delete, and common way to get your phone into the main menu.’’
list.’’ its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the 8. If you want to pair another phone,
2. Press and release the Talk button. phone’s operating manual. repeat steps 1 through 7.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing 5. Follow the prompts on your phone Once the paring process is
process requires operation of your to get it into its Search mode. The completed, AcuraLink may display a
mobile phone. For safety, only phone will search for the HFL. connection confirmation screen. This
perform this function while the When it comes up, select screen is used to create a data
vehicle is stopped. State a four- HandsFreeLink from the list of connection between your cell phone
digit code for pairing. Note this options displayed on your phone. and the AcuraLink system. You can
code. It will be requested by the choose to setup the data connection
phone.’’ 6. When asked by the phone, enter now, or do it later. If you want to do
the four-digit code from step 3 into it now, exit the HFL menu by
3. Press and release the Talk button. your phone. The HFL response is pressing the HFL Back button one
After the beep, say the four-digit ‘‘A new phone has been found. or more times.
code you want to use. For example, What would you like to name this
say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response phone?’’
is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’
236
HandsFreeLinkTM
To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this: 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone delete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
setup options are status, pair, edit, setup options are status, pair, edit, continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
delete, and list.’’ delete, and list.’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
would you like to edit?’’ would you like to delete?’’ been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
3. Press and release the Talk button. 3. Press and release the Talk button. or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
After the beep, say the name of After the beep, say the name of deleted.
the phone you want to rename. the phone you want to delete. For
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
new name for Eric’s phone?’’ to delete Eric’s phone?’’

After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
CONTINUED
237
HandsFreeLinkTM
To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
1. Press and release the Talk button. used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
setup options are status, pair, edit, The HFL response is ‘‘Phone The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
delete, and list.’’ setup options are status, pair, edit, for the next phone.’’ The HFL
delete, and list.’’ then disconnects the linked phone
2. Press and release the Talk button. and searches for another paired
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button. phone. If no other phones are
HFL responds by listing the name After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An found, the first phone remains
of each paired phone. When all example of the HFL response is, linked.
phones paired to the system have ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
been read, the HFL response is strength is three bars. Signal
‘‘The entire list has been read. strength is five bars, and the
Returning to the main menu.’’ phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’
238
HandsFreeLinkTM
Making a Call 3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
number, or by using a name in the The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
HFL phonebook. You can also redial ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you 3. Press and release the Talk button.
the last number called. During a call, will hear the person you called After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 through the audio speakers. To HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
minutes after you remove the key change the volume, use the audio ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
from the ignition switch. system volume knob. will hear the person you called
Features
through the audio speakers. To
To make a call using a phone number, 4. To end the call, press the Back change the volume, use the audio
do this: button. system volume knob.
1. With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To make a call using a name in the HFL 4. To end the call, press the Back
ON (II) position, press and release phonebook, do this: button.
the Talk button. After the beep, 1. With your phone on and the
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To redial the last number called by
response is, ‘‘What name or ON (II) position, press and release the phone, press and release the
number would you like to call/ the Talk button. After the beep, Talk button. After the beep, say
dial?’’ say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
response is ‘‘What name or ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
2. Press and release the Talk button. number would you like to call/ will hear the person you called
After the beep, say the number dial?’’ through the audio speakers. To
you want to call. For example, say change the volume, use the audio
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response 2. Press and release the Talk button. system volume knob.
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or After the beep, say the name you
continue to add numbers.’’ want to call. For example, say
239
HandsFreeLinkTM
Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button. Receiving a Call
During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you receive a call when you are not
The HFL allow you to send numbers dial tones will be sent, and the call on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
or names during a call. This is useful will continue. audio system (if it is on), and plays
when you call a menu-driven phone the incoming call notification, if
system. You can also program To send a name during a call, do this: activated. To answer the call, press
account numbers into the HFL 1. Press and release the Talk button. the Talk button and begin speaking.
phonebook for easy retrieval during After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The If you don’t want to answer the call,
menu-driven calls. HFL response is ‘‘What name or press the Back button.
number would you like to send?’’
To send a number during a call, do this: If your phone has Call Waiting, and
1. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button. you receive a call when you are on
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The After the beep, say the name you the phone, press and release the
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or want to send. For example, say Talk button to answer it. When you
number would you like to send?’’ ‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL do this, the original call is placed on
response is ‘‘Would you like to hold. To return to the original call,
2. Press and release the Talk button. send account number?’’ press the Talk button again. If you
After the beep, say the number don’t want to answer the new call,
you want to send. For example, 3. Press and release the Talk button. disregard it, and continue with your
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The original call. If you want to hang up
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to dial tones will be sent, and the call the original call and answer the new
add numbers.’’ will continue. call, press the Back button.
240
HandsFreeLinkTM
Transferring a Call To mute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

During a call, you can transfer it 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
from the HFL to your phone, or from After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
your phone to the HFL. HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete, and
To transfer a call from the HFL to your To unmute your voice, do this: list.’’
phone, do this: 2. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
The audio switches from the HFL cancelled.’’ HFL response is, ‘‘What name
to the phone. would you like to store?’’
Setting up the Phonebook
To transfer a call from your phone to the The HFL phonebook can store up 3. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL, do this: to 50 names with their associated After the beep, say the name you
2. Press and release the Talk button. numbers. These can be any types would like to store. For example,
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ of numbers. For example, you can say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The audio switches from your store a phone number and use it to The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
phone to the HFL. make a call, or you can store an number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
account number and use it during number for account number?’’
Muting a Call a call to a menu-driven phone
During a call, you can mute or system. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
unmute your voice to the person you After the beep, say the number.
are talking to. For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891.’’
CONTINUED
241
HandsFreeLinkTM
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say the new After the beep, say the name you
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account number for Eric. For example, say would like to delete. For example,
number) has been stored. ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
Returning to the main menu.’’ is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ ‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’
To edit the number of a name, do this: 5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ HFL response is ‘‘The number has HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook been changed. Returning to the been deleted. Returning to the
options are store, edit, delete, and main menu.’’ main menu.’’
list.’’
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. this:
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, ‘‘What name The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebook After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
would you like to edit?’’ options are store, edit, delete, and The HFL response is, ‘‘The
list.’’ Phonebook options are store, edit,
3. Press and release the Talk button. delete, and list.’’
After the beep, say the name you 2. Press and release the Talk button.
would like to edit. For example, After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is HFL response is, ‘‘What name
‘‘What is the new number for would you like to delete?’’
Eric?’’
242
HandsFreeLinkTM
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once HFL response is, ‘‘This process
names in the phonebook. When connected, you will hear the will clear all paired phones, clear
the end of the list is reached, the person you called through the all entries in the phonebook, and
HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list audio speakers. To change the clear the passcode. Is this what
has been read. Returning to the volume, use the audio system you would like to do?’’
main menu.’’ volume knob.
Features
To call a name from the phonebook list, Clearing the System After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
do this: This operation clears the HFL of HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
1. Press and release the Talk button. your passcode, your paired phones, clear all paired phones, all
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ and all names in the HFL phonebook. phonebook entries, and the
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook Clearing is recommended before you passcode. This may take up to 2
options are store, edit, delete, and sell your vehicle. minutes to complete.’’ Press and
list.’’ release the Talk button. After the
To clear the system, do this: beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
2. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the HFL response is, ‘‘System options 4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
names in the phonebook. When it are setup and clear.’’ period of time, the HFL response
says the name you want to call, for is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
example, Eric, press the Talk Returning to the main menu.’’
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
243
HandsFreeLinkTM
Changing Language If there are paired phones without To change from French to English, do
(Canadian Models Only) French name tags, the HFL this:
To change from English to French, do response is ‘‘Pour que le système 1. Press and release the Talk button.
this: identifie les téléphones qui ont été After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
1. Press and release the Talk button. jumelés dans une autre langue, les Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
After the beep, say ‘‘Change noms des téléphones doivent être ‘‘English or Français?’’
language.’’ The HFL response is ré-enregistrés.’’
‘‘English or Français?’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button.
NOTE: If there are paired phones After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The
2. Press and release the Talk button. without French name tags the HFL response is, ‘‘You have
After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’ following prompts will continue. selected English. Name tags that
The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez were stored while in French mode
sélectionné Français. Les noms 4. The HFL response is, for example, will not be accessible in English
enregistrés en mode Anglais ne ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour ＜ mode. Would you like to
seront pas accessible en mode Paul’s phone＞?’’ Press and continue?’’
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?’’ release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’ 3. Press and release the Talk button.
3. Press and release the Talk button. The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If there
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If there nom Français pour ＜Pat’s phone are no paired phones without
are no paired phones without ＞?’’ Press and release the Talk English name tags, the HFL
French name tags, the HFL button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’ response is ‘‘The language has
response is ‘‘La langue a été After all paired phones missing a been changed. Returning to the
changée. Retour au menu principal.’’ French name tag are re-recorded, main menu.’’
the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour au
menu principal.’’
244
HandsFreeLinkTM
If there are paired phones without HFL Limitations

English name tags, the HFL When OnStar is activated during an
response is ‘‘The language has been HFL call or when using voice control,
changed. For the system to identify the HFL call is placed on hold, or the
phones that were paired while in HFL stops its voice recognition. The
another language, the phone names HFL call will continue when OnStar
need to be re-recorded.’’ use is ended. To operate the HFL
again, press the Talk button. Then
Features
NOTE: If there are paired phones after the beep, say the appropriate
without English name tags the command.
following prompts will continue.
In addition, you cannot use the HFL
4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What while using AcuraLink.
is the English name for ＜
Téléphone de Paul＞?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for ＜Téléphone de
Pat＞?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
245
246
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 248

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 248
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 249
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling......................................249
need to know how to properly store Check Fuel Cap Message ..........250
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing
information in this section will help the Hood ..................................251
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .....................................253
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check ...............253
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 254
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 255
Carrying Cargo .............................. 257
247
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation We recommend quality gasolines

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate containing detergent additives that
reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with a help prevent fuel system and engine
extra attention to how you drive pump octane of 91 or higher. If this deposits.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). octane grade is unavailable, regular
During this period: unleaded gasoline with a pump In addition, in order to maintain good
octane of 86 or higher may be used performance, fuel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid temporarily. The use of regular emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. unleaded gasoline can cause metallic recommend, in areas where it is
knocking noises in the engine and available, the use of gasoline that
Avoid hard braking for the first will result in decreased engine does NOT contain manganese-based
200 miles (300 km). performance. The long-term use of fuel additives such as MMT.
regular-grade gasoline can lead to Use of gasoline with these additives
Do not change the oil until the engine damage. may adversely affect performance,
scheduled maintenance time. and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
Do not tow a trailer. come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
248
Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with Refueling

oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON Gasoline is highly flammable
operate on oxygenated gasoline and explosive. You can be
containing up to 10 percent ethanol burned or seriously injured
by volume and up to 15 percent when handling fuel.
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol. Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
If you notice any undesirable away.
Before Driving
operating symptoms, try another Handle fuel only outdoors.
service station or switch to another Wipe up spills immediately.
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related 1. Park with the driver’s side closest FUEL FILL CAP
information, please refer to your to the service station pump.
Quick Start Guide.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button on the driver’s door.
(To open the fuel fill door
manually, see page 351 .)
CONTINUED
249
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Check Fuel Cap Message
You may hear a hissing sound as until it clicks at least once. If you
pressure inside the tank escapes. do not properly tighten the cap,
Place the cap in the holder on the you will see ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
fuel fill door. on the multi-information display
(see right column on this page),
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel and the malfunction indicator lamp
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do may also come on (see page 349 ).
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
with temperature changes. it latches.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
system. The system helps keep appears on the multi-information
fuel vapors from going into the display after you turn the ignition
atmosphere. Consult your dealer. switch to ON (II), after you start the
engine or while you are driving. Turn
the ignition switch off and confirm
the fuel cap is installed. If it is,
loosen the cap, then retighten until it
clicks at least once.
250
The CHECK FUEL CAP message If the system still detects a loose or Opening and Closing the Hood
that is displayed after you turn the missing fuel cap, the malfunction
ignition switch to the ON (II) indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If a HOOD RELEASE LEVER
position or start the engine, should loose or missing fuel cap was not the
go off after tightening the fuel cap, cause of the CHECK FUEL CAP
turning the ignition switch off and on, message coming on, the MIL will
then driving over 12 mph (US) or 20 also come on. When the MIL comes
km/h (Canada) for at least 10 on, the message goes off.
minutes. Due to different driving
conditions, it may take a few drive Turn the engine off, and check or
Before Driving
trips to make the message go off. retighten the fuel cap until it clicks at
least once. The MIL goes out after 3
The CHECK FUEL CAP message days of normal driving once the cap
displayed while driving should go off is tightened or replaced. If it does
after tightening the fuel cap, turning not go out, have your dealer inspect 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
the ignition switch off and on, then the vehicle. For more information, parking brake. Pull the hood
driving over 30 mph (US) or 48 see page 349 . release lever located under the
km/h (Canada) for at least 45 lower left corner of the dashboard.
seconds. Due to different driving The hood will pop up slightly.
conditions, it may take a few drive
trips to make the message go off.
CONTINUED
251
LATCH
2. Reach between the hood and the 3. Lift the hood up most of the way. To close the hood, lower the hood to
front bumper with your finger. The hydraulic supports will lift it about a foot (30 cm) above the
Slide the latch handle up. up the rest of the way and hold it fender, then firmly press down on
up. the front edge of the hood. Make
If the hood latch handle moves sure it is securely latched.
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
252
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK MAX
MIN
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 308 .
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower
cloth or paper towel. mark, see Adding Engine Oil on
page 305 .
3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.
CONTINUED
253
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance Improving Fuel Economy Try to maintain a constant speed.
Checks on page 298 for information Always maintain your vehicle Every time you slow down and
about checking other items on your according to the maintenance speed up, your vehicle uses extra
vehicle. schedule. See Owner’s fuel. Use cruise control when
Maintenance Checks on page appropriate.
298 .
Combine several short trips into
For example, an underinflated tire one.
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel. The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
The build-up of snow or mud on use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
your vehicle’s underside adds ventilation when possible.
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear

possible.
254
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Acura accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 352 ) or interfere with
Before Driving
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although non-Acura accessories may When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer. If possible,
fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and have your dealer inspect the final
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability (see page 258 ). computer controlled systems, such On vehicles with side curtain
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes. airbags, do not install accessories
on the side pillars or across the
rear windows as these may
interfere with proper operation of
the side curtain airbags.
255
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with non- your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Acura components could seriously other systems.
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Some examples are: safety systems could make the
Lowering the vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
Acura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a non-

Acura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels can cause

excessive stress on suspension
components and are not
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
256
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET UTILITY POCKET storage areas:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Console compartment
Utility pocket
Trunk
In addition, the trunk pass-through
Before Driving
allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX
257
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for determining correct load (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.)
The maximum load for your vehicle limit:
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure 5. Determine the combined weight
includes the total weight of all 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the of luggage and cargo being loaded
occupants, cargo, and accessories, combined weight of occupants and on the vehicle. That weight may
and the tongue load if you are towing cargo should never exceed 850 not safely exceed the available
a trailer. lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity in
[The placard is on the driver’s step 4.
doorjamb.]
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
Overloading or improper 2. Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
loading can affect handling and of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
stability and cause a crash in will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
which you can be hurt or killed. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
Follow all load limits and other the driver and passengers from your vehicle (see page 283 ).
loading guidelines in this 850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
258
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on If you carry any items extending
Compartment a Roof Rack through the trunk pass-through,
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the tie down or secure all items that
be thrown around and hurt floor of the trunk, placing the could be thrown around the
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and vehicle and hurt someone during a
as far forward as possible. crash or sudden stop.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your If you carry large items that
view and be thrown around the prevent you from closing the trunk
vehicle during a crash. lid, exhaust gas can enter the
Before Driving
passenger area. To avoid the
Be sure items placed on the floor possibility of carbon monoxide
behind the front seats cannot roll poisoning, follow the instructions
under the seats and interfere with on page 54 .
the pedals or seat operation.
If you carry any items on a roof
Keep the glove box closed while rack, be sure the total weight of
driving. If it is open, a passenger the rack and the items does not
could injure their knees during a exceed the maximum allowable
crash or sudden stop. weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
259
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS
There are hooks on the floor and The cargo floor hooks can also be
both sides of the trunk. They can be used to tie down and secure items on
used to install the cargo net for the floor.
securing items. The side cargo
hooks are designed to hold light
items (maximum load: 6 lbf or 3 kgf
for each hook). Heavy objects may
damage the side hooks.
260
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 262

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 263
conditions, and how to operate the Check Starting System
automatic transmission. It also Message ...................................264
includes important information on Automatic Transmission............... 265
parking your vehicle, the braking SH-AWD System.............................272
system, the SH-AWD system, the Parking ............................................ 273
vehicle stability assist (VSA) system, Braking System.............................. 274
the tire pressure monitoring system Anti-lock Brakes(ABS) ................. 275
(TPMS), and facts you need if you Tires Pressure
are planning to tow a trailer. Monitoring System (TPMS) .....277
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
Driving
System......................................... 281
Towing a Trailer ............................ 283
261
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 119 ).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and pages 122 and 123 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 111 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
8. Make sure the doors and the
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire trunk are securely closed and
looks low, use a gauge to check its locked.
pressure.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Check that any items you may be your passengers have fastened
carrying are stored properly or their seat belts (see page 17 ).
fastened down securely.
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see page 59 , 68 and
76 ).
262
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starting system has an until the engine starts. 5. If the engine does not start within
auto control mode. When you turn 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
the ignition switch to the START The starter motor keeps running right away, repeat step 4 with the
(III) position, this feature keeps the automatically for up to 15 seconds accelerator pedal pressed halfway
engine’s starter motor running until until the engine starts, if: down. If the engine starts, release
the engine starts. Follow these pressure on the accelerator pedal
instructions to start the engine: The engine does not start within 7 so the engine does not race.
seconds after the starter motor
1. Apply the parking brake. began to run. 6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all You hold the ignition switch in the down, and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce START (III) position for more starting to clear flooding. If the
Driving
the drain on the battery. than 7 seconds. engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in If the engine does not start, wait at
Park. Press on the brake pedal. least 10 seconds before trying
again.
4. Without touching the accelerator The engine is harder to start in cold
pedal, turn the ignition switch to weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
the START (III) position, then altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
release the ignition switch. You do The immobilizer system protects your meters) adds to this problem.
not need to hold the ignition vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-
switch in the START (III) position coded key (or other device) is used, the
to start the engine. The engine’s engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
starter motor keeps running more inf ormation, see page 114 .
automatically for up to 7 seconds
263
Starting the Engine
Check Starting System Message If this message is on, the ignition

switch has to be held in the
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignition switch can be held in that
position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to

start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.
If there is a problem with the

starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
display when the ignition switch is
turned to ON (II). You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starting system has a
problem.
264
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from any position, press
panel show which position the shift When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a firmly on the brake pedal and slide
lever is in. In the Sequential possible problem with the the lever along the guide on the
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK console. You cannot shift out of Park
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on, TRANSMISSION’’ message on the when the ignition switch is in the
and the illuminated number under multi-information display (see page LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
the low oil pressure indicator shows 76 ). position.
you the gear you have selected.
265
To avoid transmission damage, come battery is disconnected or goes dead,

To shift from: Do this: to a complete stop before shifting you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to
P to R Press the brake pedal, then into Park. The shift lever must be in Shift Lock Release on page 270 ).
move the shift lever. Park before you can remove the key
R to N from the ignition switch. Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
N to D need to restart a stalled engine, or if
D toD3 Reverse (R) − Press the brake it is necessary to stop briefly with
D3 to D Move the lever. pedal to shift from Park to reverse. the engine idling. Shift to the Park
D to N To shift from neutral to reverse, position if you need to leave your
N to R come to a complete stop and then vehicle for any reason. Press on the
R to P shift. brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
Park (P) − This position mechani- Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so another gear.
cally locks the transmission. Use you cannot accidentally shift to
Park whenever you are turning off or reverse from neutral or any other Drive (D) − Use this position for
starting the engine. To shift out of driving position when the vehicle your normal driving. The
Park, you must press on the brake speed exceeds 5−6 mph (8−10 transmission automatically selects a
pedal and have your foot off the km/h). suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
accelerator pedal. speed and acceleration. You may
If you cannot shift to reverse when notice the transmission shifting up at
If you have done all of the above and the vehicle is stopped, press the higher engine speeds when the
still cannot move the lever out of brake pedal, slowly shift to neutral, engine is cold. This helps the engine
Park, see Shift Lock Release on and then shift to reverse. warm up faster.
page 270 .
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
266
Sequential SportShift Mode

PADDLE SHIFTER
(＋) UP SHIFT
(−) DOWN SHIFT
Driving
SELECTED GEAR
With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, To enter the Sequential SportShift While in the Sequential SportShift
you can select the Sequential mode, move the shift lever further to Mode, you can also shift up or down
SportShift mode to shift gears much the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’ using the ＋ (right side) or − (left
like a manual transmission, but move the shift lever to the side) paddle shifters on the right and
without a clutch pedal. passenger’s side. left side of the steering wheel.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
When you move the shift lever from time you push forward on the shift For up shift, press the right side (＋)
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display lever, the transmission shifts to a paddle shifter.
shows the selected gear. higher gear. Pull back on the lever to For down shift, press the left side
downshift. The number of the gear (−) paddle shifter.
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel. CONTINUED
267
When you accelerate away from a The transmission may automatically Downshifting gives you more power
stop, the transmission starts in first downshift from the higher gear to when climbing, and provides engine
gear. You have to manually upshift the lower gear under these braking when going down a steep hill.
between first and fifth gears. Make conditions:
sure you upshift before the engine The transmission also shifts
speed reaches the tachometer’s red Driving on level roads and downhill automatically as the vehicle comes to
zone. a complete stop. It downshifts to first
The transmission remains in the To shift from Speed range gear when the vehicle speed is under
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There 8 mph (13 km/h).
is no automatic downshift when you 4→3 under 17 mph
push the accelerator pedal to the (27 km/h) If you try to manually downshift at a
floor. speed that would cause the engine to
5→4 under 38 mph exceed the redline in a lower gear,
(60 km/h) the transmission does not downshift.
The gear indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
Driving uphill times, then return to the higher gear.
To shift from Speed range If the vehicle speed slows to below

the redline of the selected lower gear
4→3 under 41 mph position while the indicator is
(65 km/h) flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the display shows
5→4 under 47 mph the selected lower gear.
(75 km/h)
268
The table shows the speed ranges Starting in Second Gear

for upshifting and downshifting. To shift from Speed range When you are in Sequential
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
3→2 under 56 mph stopped, push forward on the shift
To shift from Speed range (90 km/h) lever to shift to second gear. You
will see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting
1→2 over 0 mph 4→3 under 93 mph out in second gear will help to
(0 km/h) (150 km/h) reduce wheelspin in deep snow or
on a slippery surface.
2→3 over 8 mph 5→4 under 130 mph
(13 km/h) (209 km/h) If you start out in second gear, the
transmission will be fixed in that
Driving
3→4 over 17 mph gear.
(27 km/h)
The transmission will not
4→5 over 37 mph automatically downshift to first gear
(60 km/h) even when the vehicle speed is
under 8 mph (13 km/h). You need to
shift down to first gear manually.
CONTINUED
269
Drive (D3) − This position is Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
similar to D, except only the first If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
three gears are selected. Use D3 for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain, speed will enter into the tachometer’s method of pushing on the brake
or to provide engine braking when red zone. If this occurs, you may feel pedal does not work.
going down a steep hill. D3 can also the engine cut in and out. This is
keep the transmission from cycling caused by a limiter in the engine’s 1. Set the parking brake.
between third, fourth, and fifth gears computer controls. The engine will
in stop-and-go driving. run normally when you reduce the 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in
rpm below the red zone. the LOCK (0) position.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or
D, you can get the transmission to Before downshifting, make sure the To release the reverse lockout, make
automatically downshift by pushing engine will not go into the sure the ignition switch is in the
the accelerator pedal to the floor. tachometer’s red zone. ACCESSORY(I) position.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.
270
6. Remove the built-in key from the

shift lock release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notch on the cover is on the driver’s
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 4. Insert a built-in key into the shift
lock release slot cover next to the lock release slot.
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or a metal fingernail 5. Push down on the built-in key, and
file to remove the cover. Carefully move the shift lever out of Park to
pry on the edge of the cover. neutral.
To release the reverse lockout,

move the shift lever from neutral
to reverse, then to Park.
271
SH-AWD System
The SH-AWD system is a full time SH-AWD Torque Distribution Each torque indicator is displayed
all-wheel-drive system that Monitor as a bar graph divided into 5
automatically controls and transfers segments. The number of
varying amounts of engine torque to TORQUE INDICATOR
segments represents the amount
all wheels independently, according of torque distributed to each
to the driving conditions. wheel.
While the SH-AWD system helps to When cruise control is on while

enhance the vehicle’s driving driving, the torque distribution
stability in all situations. It is still monitor is not shown.
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to When there is only a slight change in
leave a sufficient margin of safety. TORQUE INDICATOR torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the
monitor on the multi-information amount of torque. This is not a
display shows you the amount of system problem. The monitor will
torque being sent to the wheels. show the amount if the system
Each wheel: right front (RF), left senses any change in torque
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left distribution.
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.
272
SH-AWD System, Parking
If the SH-AWD indicator on the Parking Never park over dry leaves, tall
instrument panel stays on, and the Always use the parking brake when grass, or other flammable
multi-information display shows an you park your vehicle. Make sure materials. The hot three way
SH-AWD message, there is a the parking brake is set firmly or catalytic converter could cause
problem with the system. Your your vehicle may roll if it is parked these materials to catch on fire.
vehicle still has normal front-wheel on an incline.
drive with vehicle stability assist If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
(VSA), but does not have the Set the parking brake before you put the front wheels away from the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your the transmission in Park. This keeps curb.
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon the vehicle from moving and putting
as possible. pressure on the parking mechanism If the vehicle is facing downhill,
in the transmission. turn the front wheels toward the
Driving
curb.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the Check the indicator on the
windows are closed. instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Turn off the lights.
Make sure the parking brake is
Place any packages, valuables, etc., fully released before driving away.
in the trunk or take them with you. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
Lock the doors. damage the rear brakes.
273
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power through deep water. Apply the If the brake pads need replacing, you
assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes moderately to see if they feel will hear a distinctive, metallic
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock normal. If not, apply them gently and screeching sound when you apply
brake system (ABS) helps you retain frequently until they do. Be extra the brake pedal. If you do not have
steering control when braking very cautious in your driving. the brake pads replaced, they will
hard. screech all the time. It is normal for
Braking System Design the brakes to occasionally squeal or
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps The hydraulic system that operates squeak when you apply them.
the brakes applied lightly, builds up the brakes has two separate circuits.
heat, and reduces their effectiveness. Each circuit works diagonally across
It also keeps your brake lights on all the vehicle (the left-front brake is
the time, confusing drivers behind connected with the right-rear brake,
you. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
Constant application of the brakes at two wheels.
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
274
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS Indicator When the ABS indicator comes on,
helps prevent the brakes from you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
ABS INDICATOR
locking up, and helps you retain SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
steering control by pumping the information display.
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it. If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
You should never pump the brake pedal; page 350 .
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
Driving
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on, the
You will feel a pulsation in the brake anti-lock function of the braking
pedal when the ABS activates, and system has shut down. The brakes
you may hear some noise. This is still work like a conventional system,
normal: it is the ABS rapidly but without anti-lock. You should
pumping the brakes. On dry have your dealer inspect your vehicle
pavement, you will need to press on as soon as possible.
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
275
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a

longer distance to stop on loose or
ABS does not reduce the time or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
distance it takes to stop the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
vehicle. It only helps with steering lock.
control during braking.
ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent the loss of

stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
276
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure For example, if you check and fill
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Indicator your tires in a warm area, then drive
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure indicator in extremely cold weather, the tire
engine and monitors the pressure in is on, one or more of your tires is pressure will be lower than
your tires while driving. significantly underinflated. The measured and could be underinflated
multi-information display also shows and cause the low tire pressure
Each tire has its own pressure a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ indicator to come on. Or, if you
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire message (see page 279 ). You should check and adjust your tire pressure
becomes significantly low, the stop and check your tires as soon as in cooler conditions, and drive into
sensor in that tire immediately sends possible, and inflate them to the extremely hot conditions, the tire
a signal that causes the low tire proper pressure as indicated on the may become overinflated. However,
pressure indicator in the vehicle’s tire information placard. the low tire pressure indicator will
Driving
instrumental panel and the not come on if the tires are
appropriate tire position indicator on Driving on a significantly under- overinflated.
the tire pressure monitor on the inflated tire causes the tire to
multi-information display (see page overheat and can lead to tire failure. Refer to page 325 for tire inflation
278 ) to come on. Under-inflation also reduces fuel guidelines.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by

temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
CONTINUED
277
Although your tire pressure is Changing a Tire with TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor
monitored, you must manually check If you have a flat tire, the low tire
the tire pressures monthly. pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
Each tire, including the spare, should flat tire with the compact spare tire
be checked monthly when cold, and (see page 336 ).
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the vehicle After you replace the flat tire with
placard and in the owner’s manual the spare, the low tire pressure
(see page 326 ). indicator stays on. This is normal;
the system is not monitoring the
If you think you can safely drive a spare tire pressure. Manually check
short distance to a service station, the spare tire pressure to be sure it
proceed slowly to the station, then is correct.
inflate the tire to the recommended When all tire pressures are normal,
pressure. Never use a puncture-repairing agent the multi-information display will
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to show ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OK
If the tire is flat, or if the tire replace the tire pressure sensor. SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.’’
pressure is too low to continue Have the flat tire repaired by your
driving, replace the tire with the dealer as soon as possible. When any of the tires has low
compact spare tire. pressure, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE
ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION
NORMAL’’ message (see page 72 ).
278
Tire Pressure Readings

U.S.
VEHICLE ICON
Driving
If there is a system error with the If any of the tires have low pressure, When the TPMS is functioning
TPMS, the multi-information display the multi-information display will normally, you can press the SEL/
shows a ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION shows a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ RESET button on the steering wheel
ERROR’’ message (see page 72 ), message. You will also see one or to see the pressure readings of each
and the tire pressure readings will more low pressure tire positions tire in psi (U.S. models) or kPa
not be displayed. You will also see a blinking in the display (see page (Canadian models) (see page 74 ).
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message 277 ).
on the multi-information display (see
page 280 ).
CONTINUED
279
Check TPMS System Message If the low tire pressure indicator

comes on, or the multi-information
CANADA display shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA system
automatically turns on even when
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 282 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
If one or more tires have low If there is a problem with the TPMS,
pressure, the low tire pressure the multi-information display shows
indicator on the instrument panel a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
also comes on (see page 277 ). message (see page 77 ). If you see
this message, the system is not
When cruise control is on while monitoring tire pressure. Have your
driving, the pressure reading cannot vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
be checked by the tire pressure as possible.
monitor on the multi-information
display.
280
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator When the VSA system indicator
system helps to stabilize the vehicle comes on, you will also see a
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink (see on the multi-information display.
assists you in maintaining traction page 63 ).
while accelerating on loose or Without VSA, your vehicle still has
slippery road surfaces. It does this VSA System Indicator normal braking and cornering ability,
by regulating the engine’s output and but it does not have VSA traction and
by selectively applying the brakes. If the VSA system indicator comes stability enhancement.
on while driving, pull to the side of
When VSA activates, you may notice the road when it is safe, and turn off If the low tire pressure indicator
that the engine does not respond to the engine. Reset the system by comes on (see page 277 ), or the
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it restarting the engine. If the VSA multi-information display shows a
does at other times. system indicator stays on, or comes ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message
back on while driving, have the VSA (see page 280 ), the VSA system
The VSA system cannot enhance the system inspected by your dealer. automatically turns on even when
vehicle’s driving stability in all the VSA system is turned off with
situations and does not control your If the indicator does not come on the VSA OFF switch. In this case,
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is when the ignition switch is turned to you cannot turn the VSA system off
still your responsibility to drive and ON (II), there may be a problem by pressing the VSA OFF switch
corner at reasonable speeds and to with the VSA system. Have your again.
leave a sufficient margin of safety. dealer inspect your vehicle as soon
as possible (see page 63 ).
281
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Driving with varying tire or wheel
VSA OFF SWITCH sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 326 ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you

need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page 336 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure

they are the same size as those that
This switch is at the right side of the were originally supplied with your
left vent. Press it to turn VSA on and vehicle. Exercise the same caution
off. during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
When VSA is off, the VSA activation VSA.
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
282
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
Driving
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everthing in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. Towing a load that is too heavy trailer weight. Too much tongue
can seriously affect your vehicle’s load reduces front-tire traction and
handling and performance. It can steering control. Too little tongue
also damage the engine and load can make the trailer unstable
drivetrain. and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED
283
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Checking Loads Towing Equipment and

start by loading 60 percent of the The best way to confirm that vehicle Accessories
load toward the front of the trailer and trailer weights are within limits Towing generally requires a variety
and 40 percent toward the rear, then is to have them checked at a public of supplemental equipment,
re-adjust the load as needed. scale. depending on the size of your trailer,
how much load you are towing, and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Using a suitable scale or a special where you tow. To ensure the best
(GVWR): tongue load gauge, check the tongue quality, we recommend that you
The maximum allowable weight of load the first time you set up a purchase Acura equipment
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, towing combination (a fully-loaded whenever possible.
and the tongue load is: 4,980 lbs vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
(2,260 kg) tongue load whenever the conditions Discuss your needs with your trailer
change. sales or rental agency, and follow the
Gross Axle Weight Rating guidelines in the rest of this section.
(GAWR): Also make sure that all equipment is
The maximum allowable weight of properly installed and maintained,
the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs and that it meets federal, state,
(1,215 kg) on the front axle, and province, and local regulations.
2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear
axle. Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
284
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Always use safety chains when you Acura recommends that any trailer Trailer lights and equipment must
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains having a total weight of 1,000 lbs comply with federal, state, and local
are secured to the trailer and hitch, (450 kg) or more be equipped with regulations. Check with your local
and that they cross under the tongue its own electric or surge-type brakes. recreational vehicle dealer for the
and can catch the trailer if it requirements in your area, and use
becomes unhitched. Leave enough If you choose electric brakes, be only equipment designed for your
slack to allow the trailer to turn sure they are electrically actuated. vehicle.
corners easily, but do not let the Do not attempt to tap into your
chains drag on the ground. vehicle’s hydraulic system. No Since lighting and wiring vary by
matter how successful it may seem, trailer type and brand, you should
any attempt to attach trailer brakes have a qualified technician install a
Driving
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system suitable connector between the
will lower braking effectiveness and vehicle and the trailer. Improper
create a potential hazard. equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
285
Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
Many states and Canadian provinces When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
require special outside mirrors when driving away, be sure to check the properly.
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t, following:
you should install special mirrors if Your vehicle tires and spare are
you cannot clearly see behind you, or The vehicle has been properly properly inflated, and the trailer
if the trailer creates a blind spot. serviced, and the tires, brakes, tires and spare are inflated as
suspension, cooling system, and recommended by the trailer
Ask your trailer sales or rental lights are in good operating maker.
agency if any other items are condition.
recommended or required for your
towing situation. All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any

other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
286
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer When driving uphill and downhill, Making Turns and Braking
The added weight, length, and use the Sequential SportShift mode Make turns more slowly and wider
height of a trailer will affect your to provide the proper engine power than normal. The trailer tracks a
vehicle’s handling and performance, and engine braking on each gear. smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
so driving with a trailer requires Select fourth, third, second, or first can hit or run over something the
some special driving skills and gear; depending on the vehicle vehicle misses. Allow more time and
techniques. speeds and read condition. Do not distance for braking. Do not brake or
use fifth gear. The recommended turn suddenly as this could cause the
For your safety and the safety of speed range for each gear position is trailer to jackknife or turn over.
others, take time to practice driving shown in the table.
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
Driving
below. Gear position Speed range
Towing Speeds and Gears 1 0 − 30 km/h

Drive slower than normal in all (0 − 19 mph)
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. 2 30 − 50 km/h
Use D position when towing a trailer (19 − 31 mph)
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a 3 50 − 65 km/h
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘ Driving (31 − 41 mph)
on Hills’’ on the next page for
additional gear information.) 4 over 65 km/h
(over 41 mph)
CONTINUED
287
Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt
the red (hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause trailer to
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if sway. When being passed by a large
necessary, pull to the side of the vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
road to let the engine cool. steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
If the automatic transmission shifts corrections.
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3. Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
If you must stop when facing uphill, someone guide you when backing up.
use the foot brake or parking brake. Grip the bottom of the steering
Do not try to hold the vehicle in wheel; turn the wheel to the left to
place by pressing on the accelerator, get the trailer to move to the left,
as this can cause the automatic and turn the wheel right to move the
transmission to overheat. trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce Parking

your speed, and shift down to second Follow all normal precautions when
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and parking, including firmly setting the
remember, it will take longer to slow parking brake and putting the
down and stop when towing a trailer. transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
288
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 290

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 291
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 301
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 303
Engine Compartment Covers....... 304
This section also includes Adding Engine Oil ......................... 305
instructions on how to read the Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 306
maintenance messages in the multi- Engine Coolant ............................... 308
information display, a maintenance Windshield Washers ..................... 310
record, and instructions for simple Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 310
maintenance tasks you may want to Brake Fluid ..................................... 311
take care of yourself. Power Steering Fluid..................... 312
Timing Belt ..................................... 313
If you have the skills and tools to Lights .............................................. 314
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 321
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Floor Mats ...................................... 322
to purchase the service manual. See Wiper Blades .................................. 323
page 381 for information on how to Tires ................................................ 325
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Checking the Battery .................... 331
Vehicle Storage .............................. 333
289
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the can decide whether or not you
engine and exhaust system cool should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and before touching any parts.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
290
Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and Engine Oil Life Minder The remaining engine oil life is
important features of the multi- displayed on the engine oil life
information display on your vehicle minder according to the table shown
is the maintenance minder. below.
Based on engine operating Calculated Engine Displayed

conditions and accumulated engine Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life
revolutions, the onboard computer in (%)
your vehicle calculates the remaining 100% − 91% 100%
engine oil life. 90% − 81% 90%
80% − 71% 80%
The system also displays the code 70% − 61% 70%
for other scheduled maintenance REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE 60% − 51% 60%
items needing service. 50% − 41% 50%
Maintenance
To see the remaining engine oil life 40% − 31% 40%
displayed on the lower right corner 30% − 21% 30%
on the multi-information display as a 20% − 16% 20%
percentage, turn the ignition switch 15% − 11% 15%
to ON (II), and press the SEL/ 10% − 6% 10%
RESET button on the steering wheel 5% − 1% 5%
repeatedly until the engine oil life 0% 0%
minder appears (see page 71 ).
CONTINUED
291
Maintenance Minder
The message will be canceled if the

▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again. MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE REMAINING
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE CODE ENGINE OIL LIFT
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS
When the remaining engine oil life is Press the SEL/RESET button on the
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE the engine oil life minder, the
SOON’’ message along with the message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
maintenance schedule code the percentage of oil life remaining,
indicating the main and sub items and the maintenance item code, are
required at the time of the oil change. displayed on the lower part of the
Refer to page 299 and 300 for a multi-information display.
complete list of the maintenance
main items and sub items.
292
Maintenance Minder

to see the message again.
Maintenance
When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5 Press the SEL/RESET button on the
percent, the multi-information steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE the engine oil life minder, the
NOW’’ message with the same message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE the percentage ‘‘5%,’’ and the
SOON’’ was displayed. When you maintenance item code are displayed
see this message have the indicated on the lower part of the multi-
maintenance performed as soon as information display when the
possible. calculated engine oil life is 1−5
percent (see page 291 ).
CONTINUED
293
Maintenance Minder
Your dealer will reset the display To cancel resetting the oil life,
after completing the required press the ▲ or ▼ button on the
maintenance service. You will see U.S. steering wheel to select CANCEL
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the on the display, and press the SEL/
next time you turn the ignition RESET button.
switch to ON (II).
If you do not complete the reset
If maintenance service is done by CANADA
procedure within 30 seconds after
some one other than your dealer, selecting the reset mode, the mode
reset the maintenance minder as will be canceled automatically.
follows:
If you have the required service
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). performed but do not reset the
display, or reset the display without
2. If the oil life minder is not 3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET performing the service, the system
displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for will not show the proper
button on the steering wheel more than 10 seconds. The maintenance intervals. This can lead
repeatedly until it is. remaining engine oil life reset to serious mechanical problems
mode will be shown on the multi- because you will no longer have an
information display. accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
To reset the engine oil life, press
the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering
wheel to select RESET on the
display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.
294
Maintenance Minder
Immediately have the service

performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.

to see the message again.
Maintenance
If the indicated maintenance service Press the SEL/RESET button on the
is not done and the remaining engine steering wheel repeatedly to select
oil life reaches 0 percent, the multi- the engine oil life minder, the
information display will show the message ‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ along with
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ the percentage ‘‘0%,’’ and the
and the maintenance item code. This maintenance item code are displayed
message is displayed when the total on the lower part of the multi-
mileage after reaching 0 percent information display when the
engine oil life is less than 10 miles calculated engine oil life is 0−1
(for U.S. models)/10 km (for percent.
Canadian models).
CONTINUED
295
Maintenance Minder
And also, the percentage ‘‘0’’ keeps This message is displayed when you
blinking on the display. drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE or 10 km (for Canadian models)
This particular message is displayed U.S. after seeing the 0 percent message.
when the mileage after the engine oil
life became 0 percent reaches 10 Immediately have the service
miles (for U.S. models)/10 km (for performed, and make sure to reset
Canadian models). the display as previously described.
MAINTENANCE CODE
CANADA
The maximum total mileage shown
with this message is ‘‘999 mile (for
U.S. models) or 999 km (for
Canadian models)’’.
If the indicated required service is The message will be canceled if the

not done and the remaining engine ▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
oil life becomes 0 percent, the multi- is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
information display will show a to see the message again.
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total mileage after the remaining
oil life became 0 percent, and the
maintenance item code.
296
Maintenance Minder
This particular message is displayed Your authorized dealer knows your

when you drive over 10 miles (for vehicle best and can provide
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian competent, efficient service.
U.S. models) after seeing 0 percent. However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
The maximum total negative mileage in effect. Maintenance may be done
is ‘‘−999 mile (for U.S. models) or by any qualified service facility or
CANADA −999 km (for Canadian models)’’. person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
TOTAL PAST DUE MILAGE warranty booklet for more
information.
Maintenance
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life We recommend the use of Acura
minder, the message ‘‘CHANGE parts and fluids whenever you have
OIL’’ along with the maintenance maintenance done. These are
item code, and the total negative manufactured to the same high-
mileage after the oil life became 0 quality standards as the original
percent, will be displayed on the components, so you can be confident
lower part of the multi-information of their performance and durability.
display.
CONTINUED
297
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 314 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 253 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, Acura you fill the fuel tank. See page 308 .
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance Automatic transmission − Check
with the intervals indicated by the the fluid level monthly. See page
Multi-Information Display. 310 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 311 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
325 .
298
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A Replace engine oil＊1
B Replace engine oil and oil filter
Rotate tires
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Maintenance Minder
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃
＊1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column

on page 298 .
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-Information

Display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
CONTINUED
299
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Sub Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

1 Rotate tires 6 Replace rear differential fluid
2 Replace air cleaner element Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
miles (24,000 km). mechanical (shear) stress to fluid This requires
Replace dust and pollen filter differential fluid changes more frequently than
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions,
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
miles (24,000 km). (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
Inspect drive belt

3 Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer temperatures.
This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regulary drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under-20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada)
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
300
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle.
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
CONTINUED
301
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
302
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange loop) (Black cap)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC
WASHER FLUID TRANSMISSION
(Black cap) FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
Maintenance
POWER STEERING
FLUID＊
(Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
＊: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.
303
Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine

compartment are protected by RIGHT COMPARTMENT COVER LEFT COMPARTMENT COVER
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.
All of the covers are secured by

holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,

remove the holding clips with a flat-
tipped screwdriver.
To remove the left or right engine

compartment cover, remove the
holding clips by loosening the pins in
the center of the fastener.
To remove the battery cover, turn

the knob of the fastener (see page
332 ).
FRONT BULKHEAD COVER BATTERY COVER
304
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
Maintenance
fill cap on top of the left valve cover. 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so highly recommended that you use
you do not spill. Clean up any spills Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
immediately. Spilled oil could optimum engine protection. Make
damage components in the engine sure the API Certification Seal says
compartment. ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
API CERTIFICATION SEAL The oil viscosity or weight is
Install the engine oil fill cap, and provided on the container’s label.
tighten it securely. Wait a few 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
minutes, and recheck the oil level. round protection of your vehicle to
Do not fill above the upper mark; you improve cold weather starting and
could damage the engine. fuel economy. CONTINUED
305
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter OIL DRAIN BOLT
You may use a synthetic motor oil if Always change the oil and filter
it meets the same requirements according to the maintenance
WASHER
given for a conventional motor oil: it messages shown on the multi-
displays the API Certification Seal, information display. The oil and filter
and it is the proper weight. You must collect contaminants that can
follow the oil and filter change damage your engine if they are not
intervals given on the maintenance removed regularly.
schedule.
Changing the oil and filter requires
Engine Oil Additives special tools and access from
Your vehicle does not require any oil underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
additives. Additives may adversely should be raised on a service station-
affect the engine or transmission type hydraulic lift for this service. 2. Open the hood, and remove the
performance and durability. Unless you have the knowledge and engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
proper equipment, you should have drain bolt and washer from the
this maintenance done by a skilled bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
mechanic. into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
306
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to: Improper disposal of engine oil can be
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
6. Refill the engine with the the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
recommended oil. container, and take it to a recycling
Engine oil change capacity center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
(including filter): or dump it on the ground.
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.

Start the engine. The oil pressure
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the indicator should go out within 5
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special seconds. If it does not, turn off the
wrench (available from your engine, and check your work.
dealer) is required.
8. Let the engine run for several
4. Install a new oil filter according to minutes, then check the drain bolt
the instructions that come with it. and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit

for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
307
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda All Season If the reserve tank is completely
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This empty, you should also check the
RESERVE TANK coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
308
Engine Coolant
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and

tighten it fully.
RADIATOR CAP
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
RESERVE TANK engine components.
Maintenance
1. When the radiator and engine are 3. The coolant level should be up to
cool, relieve any pressure in the the base of the filler neck. Add
cooling system by turning the coolant if it is low.
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down. Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any spill
2. Remove the radiator cap by immediately; it could damage
pushing down and turning components in the engine
counterclockwise. compartment.
309
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level in the Check the fluid level with the engine
windshield washer reservoir at least at normal operating temperature.
monthly during normal use.
If the washer fluid is low, a 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message Shut off the engine.
appears on the multi-information
display. DIPSTICK
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
UPPER MARK
windshield washer fluid. This LOWER MARK
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
blades with windshield washer fluid the transmission as shown.
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them. 4. Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze between the upper and lower
or a vinegar/water solution in the 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) marks.
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze from the transmission, and wipe it
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while with a clean cloth.
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
310
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower To thoroughly flush the transmission, Brake Fluid
mark, add fluid into the dipstick the technician should drain and refill Check the brake fluid level in the
tube to bring it to the upper mark. it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the reservoirs monthly.
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully three times. Then drain and refill the Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,
so you do not spill any. Clean up transmission a final time. independent of mileage.
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Always use Honda Heavy Duty
compartment. into the transmission securely as Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
shown in the illustration. available, you should use only DOT 3
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
(automatic transmission fluid). If The transmission should be drained container, as a temporary
it’s not available, you may use a and refilled with new fluid when this replacement.
DEXRON III automatic service is shown on a maintenance
Maintenance
transmission fluid as a temporary message in the Multi-Information Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
replacement. However, continued Display. cause corrosion and decrease the life
use can affect the shift quality. of the system. Have the brake
Have the transmission flushed and If you are not sure how to add fluid, system flushed and refilled with
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as contact your dealer. Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
soon as it is convenient. DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
CONTINUED
311
Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so

you do not spill any. Clean up any
UPPER LEVEL spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering

Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
MAX MIN with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
LOWER LEVEL
The fluid level should be between A low power steering fluid level can
the MIN and MAX marks on the side After removing the right engine indicate a leak in the system. Check
of the reservoir. If the level is at or compartment cover (see page 304 ), the fluid level frequently, and have
below the MIN mark, your brake check the level on the side of the the system inspected as soon as
system needs attention. Have the reservoir when the engine is cold. possible.
brake system inspected for leaks or The fluid should be between the
worn brake pads. UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
312
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t at the intervals shown on the
or right lock and holding it there can maintenance minder. Replace the
damage the power steering pump. belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
you regularly drive your vehicle in
one or more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures

(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures

(under −20°F, −29°C).
Maintenance
If you frequently tow a trailer.
313
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/Daytime The low beam headlight bulbs are a
Your vehicle is equipped with an Running Light Bulb type of high voltage discharge tube.
automatic headlight adjusting Your vehicle has halogen high beam High voltage can remain in the
system that adjusts the vertical aim headlight bulbs which is also used circuit even with the light switch off
of the low beam headlights for the daytime running light. and the key removed. Because of
automatically. Refer to page 108 for Handle it by its base and protect the this, you should not attempt to
more information. glass from contact with your skin or examine or change a low beam
The high beam headlights were hard objects. If you touch the glass, headlight bulb yourself. If a low
properly aimed when your vehicle clean it with denatured alcohol and a beam headlight bulb fails, take the
was new. If you regularly carry clean cloth. vehicle to your dealer to have it
heavy items in the trunk or pull a replaced.
trailer, readjustment may be
required. Adjustment of the high
beam headlights should be Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
performed by a dealer or other perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
mechanic. can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
314
Lights
1. Remove the left or right side NUTS BULB

engine compartment cover from
the side you are working on by
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page 304 ).
BATTERY HOLD-DOWN
If you are replacing the bulb on 2. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
the driver’s side, remove the from the bulb by pushing on the
battery cover (see page 332 ), then tab and pulling the connector
remove the battery hold-down by down.
removing the two nuts with a 10
mm wrench. Then carefully slide 3. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
the battery toward the engine to quarter turn counterclockwise.
access the bulb.
CONTINUED
315
Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole Replacing a Front Turn Signal BULB SOCKET
and turn it one-quarter turn clock- Bulb
wise to lock it in place. 1. Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
5. Push the electrical connector back the side you are working on by
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on carefully pulling the cover out (see
all the way. page 304 ).
6. Turn on the headlights to test the If you are replacing a driver’s side
new bulb. bulb, slide the battery toward the
engine to get more clearance (see
7. (Driver’s side) page 332 ).
Reinstall the battery in the reverse
order of removal, and reinstall the 2. Remove the socket from the
cover on the battery. headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
8. Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover. 3. Push the bulb in slightly, and turn
it counterclockwise.
316
Lights
4. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a Front Position/Side

socket. Marker Light Bulb
1. Remove the left or right side
5. Insert the socket back into the engine compartment cover (see
headlight assembly. Turn it page 304 ).
clockwise to lock it in place. BULB
If you are replacing a driver’s side
6. Turn on the lights to make sure bulb, slide the battery toward the
the new bulb is working. engine to get more clearance (see
page 332 ).
7. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery and the 2. (Passenger’s side) HOLDING CLIP
battery cover. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the 3. Remove the socket from the
Maintenance
8. Reinstall the engine compartment windshield washer reservoir. headlight assembly by turning it
side cover. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.
CONTINUED
317
Lights
5. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb BOLTS
socket. Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
6. Insert the socket back into the it by its plastic case and protect the
headlight assembly. Turn it glass from contact with your skin or
clockwise to lock it in place. hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
7. Turn on the lights to make sure clean cloth.
the new bulb is working.
8. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery and the Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, CLIP
battery cover. perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and 1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
(Passenger’s side) shatter. remove the two mounting bolts
Reinstall the windshield washer and remove the holding clip with a
reservoir. flat-tipped screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the engine compartment 2. Carefully push up the side under

side cover. cover into the bumper.
318
Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole

and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
6. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the

new bulb.
BULB 8. Reinstall the two mounting bolts
on the side under cover and
3. Remove the electrical connector tighten them securely. Put the
Maintenance
from the bulb by pushing on the holding clip back on the side
tab and pulling the connector under cover and push on the
down. centre until it locks (the centre is
flush with the head).
4. Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
319
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs

BOLTS
MOUNTING NUT BULBS

MAINTENANCE LID
TAIL LIGHT TRIM
1. Open the trunk lid, and remove 3. Carefully pry in the top or bottom 6. Determine which of the two bulbs
the left or right maintenance lid. edge of the with a small flat-tipped is burned out: turn signal or back-
screwdriver, and pull the trim up light.
2. Remove the mounting nut with an straight back.
8 mm wrench. 7. Remove the socket by turning it
4. Remove the two mounting bolts one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
with an 8 mm wrench.
8. Remove the burned out bulb by
5. Pull the taillight assembly straight pulling it straight out of its socket.
back out of the body.
320
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
9. Install the new bulb in the socket Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
by pushing it straight in the socket belt anchors can cause the belts to
until it bottoms. retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
LOOP the loops with a clean cloth
10.Reinstall the socket into the light dampened in mild soap and warm
assembly. Turn it clockwise to water or isopropyl alcohol.
lock it in place.
11.Test the lights to make sure the

new bulb is working.
12.When reinstalling the taillight

assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Tighten the two
Maintenance
mounting bolts and reinstall the If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
trim in place. brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
13.Tighten the mounting nut securely, not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
and reinstall the maintenance lid. solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
321
Floor Mats
Floor Mats
DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT FRONT PASSENGER’S REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
SIDE FLOOR MAT
HOOK
Front
Front
Front
HOOK HOOK
The floor mats that came with your If you use a non-Acura floor mat, Make sure the rear floor mats are
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors. make sure it fits properly and that it properly hooked to the floor mat
This keeps the floor mats from can be used with the floor mat anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
sliding forward/rearward and anchors. Do not put additional floor with front passenger’s seat weight
possibly interfering with the pedals mats on top of the anchored mats. sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
or making the front passenger’s mat is on the seat rail of the front
weight sensor’s ineffective. passenger’s seat, the sensors will
If you remove a floor mat, make sure detect the decreased weight on the
to re-anchor it when you put it back seat and they may not work properly.
in your vehicle.
322
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper HOLDING LOCATIONS COVER

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
WIPER ARMS SCREWS
1. Adjust the windshield wiper arms 2. Push the edge of the cover on the
Maintenance
to the winter position by holding blade assembly until the other side
both wiper arms as shown in the of edge is pivoted out, and remove
illustration at the same time (see the cover.
page 103 ). Raise the wiper arms
off the windshield. 3. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by removing
the two screws from the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
323
Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 6. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
7. Reinstall the blade assembly to the

wiper arm and tighten the two
screws securely. Reinstall the
cover by pushing in.
8. Set the wiper arms back on the

windshield. Adjust the windshield
wipers to their previously parked
REINFORCEMENT position.
4. Remove the blade from its holder 5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
324
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines We recommend that you visually
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated check your tires every day. If you
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of think a tire might be low, check it
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding immediately with a tire gauge.
comfort.
The following pages give more Use a gauge to measure the air
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, pressure at least once a month. Even
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel tires that are in good condition may
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
fail from being overheated. to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
Overinflated tires can make your the same time.
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road Check the pressure in the tires when
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly. they are cold. This means the vehicle
be seriously hurt or killed. has been parked for at least three
The tire pressure monitoring system hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) will warn you when a tire km).
owner’s manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 277 for
inflation and maintenance. information on the TPMS. Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 326 .
CONTINUED
325
Tires
If you check the pressure when the Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection
tires are hot [driven for several miles This chart shows the recommended Every time you check inflation, you
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 cold tire pressures for most normal should also examine the tires for
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 and high speed driving conditions. damage, foreign objects, and wear.
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal; do not Tire Size/Ttpe Cold Tire Pressure You should look for:
release air to match the cold P245/50R17 98V Front
pressure. 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Bumps or bulges in the tread or
Rear side of the tire. Replace the tire if
You should get your own tire 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) you find either of these conditions.
pressure gauge and use it whenever Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
you check your tire pressures. This T155/70D17 Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
will make it easier for you to tell if a 110M of the tire. Replace the tire if you
pressure loss is due to a tire problem can see fabric or cord.
and not due to a variation between For convenience, the recommended
gauges. tire sizes and cold tire pressures are Excessive tread wear.
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are For additional technical information
punctured, you should look closely about your tires, see page 367 .
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
326
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

In addition to proper inflation,
Front Front
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if

you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across balance. the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
the tread. This shows there is less km). Move the tires to the positions
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left shown in the chart each time they
on the tire. are rotated. If you purchase
Improper wheel weights can damage directional tires, rotate only front-to-
A tire this worn gives very little your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use back.
traction on wet roads. You should only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
replace the tire if you can see three If you rotate tires, check air pressure
or more tread wear indicators. of all tires.
327
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at Wheels and Tires
Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible Wheels: 17 x 8.0J AL (TPMS)
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair. Tires: P245/50R17 98V
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling. See page 368 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever need to replace a wheel, 370 for tire size explanation.
your vehicle can reduce braking make sure the wheel’s specifications
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheel
accuracy. Using tires of a different that came on your vehicle.
size or construction can cause the Replacement wheels are available at
ABS and vehicle stability assist your Acura dealer.
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
Installing improper tires on your

vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of

tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
328
Tires
Winter Driving Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All If you mount snow tires on your Mount snow chains on your tires
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- vehicle, make sure they are radial when required by driving conditions
weather tread design suitable for tires of the same size and load range or local laws. Install them only on the
most winter driving conditions. as original tires. Mount snow tires on front tires.
all four wheels. The traction
For the best performance in snowy provided by snow tires on dry roads Because your vehicle has limited tire
or icy conditions, you should install may be lower than your original tires. clearance, Acura strongly
snow tires or tire chains. They may Check with the tire dealer for recommends using the chains listed
be required by local laws under maximum speed recommendations. below, made by Security Chain
certain conditions. Company (SCC).
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain

CH2612T
Maintenance
CONTINUED
329
Tires
When installing cables, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not Traction devices that are the wrong
Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can size or improperly installed can
the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed. driving if they are hitting any part of
the body or chassis, stop and the vehicle.
investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
330
Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicle’s
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative (−) cable first, and
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last.
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion. The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is operation.
needed, see your dealer or a
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the
Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test battery to explode with enough
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
To see the label, remove the battery Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
cover (see page 332 ). mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
CONTINUED
331
Checking the Battery
If your vehicle’s battery is power tilt and telescopic steering 2. Push the tabs and remove the
disconnected or goes dead, all stored wheel system will be disabled. The cover by pulling it up carefully.
driving positions will be lost. To system needs to be reset after
store the driving positions again, see reconnecting the battery (see page 3. To reinstall the cover, put the tabs
the storing procedure on page 124 . 112 ). of the cover back to the original
position properly.
On vehicles with navigation system Removing the Battery Cover
The navigation system will also 4. Turn the knob of the cover to
disable itself. The next time you turn LOCK LOCK position as showing in the
UNLOCK
on the ignition switch, the system illustration.
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If you vehicle’s battery is

disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system will disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio you will KNOB
see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency TAB
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page 1. Turn the knob of the battery cover
199 ). You will then have enter your to UNLOCK as shown in the
station presets. illustration.
If your vehicle’s battery is

disconnected or goes dead, the
332
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front wiper blade
Maintenance
completely. arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
Leave the parking brake off. Put vehicle body wax to the painted
the transmission in Park. surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
333
334
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 336

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 337
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 341
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 343
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 345
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 348
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 348
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 349
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 350
on getting your vehicle towed. Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 351
Fuses ............................................... 352
Fuse Locations ............................... 357
Emergency Towing ....................... 360
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 361

335
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use your compact spare
soon as you can. tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you Turn off the VSA system (see
check the other tires. It should be page 282 ). Driving with the
inflated to: compact spare tire may activate
the VSA system.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Follow these precautions: Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
This tire gives a harsher ride and same wheel. The spare tire is not
less traction on some road sur- designed to be mounted on a regular
faces. Use greater caution while wheel, and the spare wheel is not
driving. designed for mounting a regular tire.
336
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TRUNK FLOOR SPARE TIRE
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until The vehicle can easily roll off
you get to an exit or an area to stop the jack, seriously injuring
that is far away from the traffic lanes. anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL CASE JACK
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. Open the trunk, and fold the trunk
non-slippery ground. Put the floor forward.
transmission in Park. Apply the

parking brake. 4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to 5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and
LOCK (0). Have all passengers get remove the spacer cone. Then
out of the vehicle while you take the spare tire out of its well.
change the tire.
CONTINUED
337
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 7. Place the jack under the jacking 8. Use the extension and the wheel
with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the
change. It is pointed to by a △ vehicle until the flat tire is off the
mark molded into the underside of ground.
the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack 9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
contacts the jacking point. Make remove the flat tire. Temporarily
sure the jacking point tab is place the flat tire on the ground
resting in the jack notch. with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
338
BRAKE HUB
10.Before mounting the spare tire, 11.Put on the spare tire. Put the 12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
wipe any dirt off the mounting wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack.
surface of the wheel and hub with then tighten them in a crisscross

a clean cloth. Wipe the hub pattern with the wheel nut wrench
carefully; it may be hot from until the wheel is firmly against
driving. the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
CONTINUED
339
SPACER CONE 16. Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the flat
tire.
Loose items can fly around the

interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

WING BOLT securely before driving.
13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 14.Place the flat tire face down in the
the same crisscross pattern. Have spare tire well.
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service 15.Wrap the spacer cone and spare
facility. tire wing bolt with cloth or paper,
Tighten the wheel nuts to: and store them in the spare tire
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m) well.
340
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to START
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly (III). If the headlights do not dim,
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to check the condition of the fuses. If
ignition switch to START (III): START (III), you do not hear the the fuses are OK, there is
normal noise of the engine trying to probably something wrong with
You hear nothing, or almost start. You may hear a clicking sound the electrical circuit for the
nothing. The engine’s starter or series of clicks, or nothing at all. ignition switch or starter motor.
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things: You will need a qualified
operates very slowly. technician to determine the
Make sure the remote is with you, problem (see Emergency Towing
You can hear the starter motor inside the vehicle. on page 360 ).
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning Check the transmission interlock. If the headlights dim noticeably or
faster than normal, but the engine The transmission must be in Park go out when you try to start the
does not start up and run. or neutral or the starter will not engine, either the battery is
operate. discharged or the connections are

corroded. Check the condition of
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the battery and terminal
Turn on the headlights, and check connections (see page 331 ). You
their brightness. If the headlights can then try jump starting the
are very dim or do not come on at vehicle from a booster battery
all, the battery is discharged. See (see page 343 ).
Jump Starting on page 343 .
341
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally There may be an electrical

In this case, the starter motor’s problem, such as no power to the
speed sounds normal, or even faster fuel pump. Check all the fuses
than normal, when you turn the (see page 352 ).
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run. If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
Are you using the proper starting the problem. See Emergency
procedure? Refer to Starting the Towing on page 360 .
Engine on page 263 .
Are you using a properly coded

built-in key or remote? An
improperly coded built-in key or
remote will cause the immobilizer
system indicator in the instrument
panel to blink rapidly (see page
114).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel

gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
342
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To Jump Start Your Vehicle: COVER
procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
precautions. physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can f reeze.
and smoking materials away Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
from the battery. battery can cause it to rupture. 3. Remove the battery cover (see
page 332 ), then remove the
2. Turn off all the electrical acces- secondary under-hood fuse box

You cannot start your vehicle by sories: heater, A/C, climate cover from the positive (＋)
pushing or pulling it. control, stereo system, lights, etc. terminal on the battery.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake.
343
Jump Starting
7. Start your vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
8. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
BOOSTER BATTERY
9. Reinstall the secondary under-
The numbers in the illustration show 5. Connect the second jumper cable hood fuse box cover over the
you the order to connect the jumper to the negative (−) terminal on positive (＋) terminal of the
cables. the booster battery. Connect the battery, then reinstall the battery
other end to the grounding point cover.
4. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this
positive (＋) terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of Keep the ends of the jumper
vehicle’s battery. Connect the the engine. cables away from each other and
other end to the positive (＋) any metal on the vehicle until
terminal on the booster battery. 6. If the booster battery is in another everything is disconnected.
vehicle, have an assistant start Otherwise, you may cause an
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. electrical short.
344
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
gauge climbing to or above the red Put the transmission in Park, and 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or set the parking brake. Turn off all the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators. 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
2. If you see steam and/or spray Everything is still extremely hot,

Driving with the temperature gauge coming from under the hood, so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause turn off the engine. Wait until must be repaired before you
serious damage to the engine. you see no more signs of steam continue driving (see Emergency
or spray, then open the hood. Towing on page 360 ).
CONTINUED
345
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and watch
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
7. If there was no coolant in the the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 360 ).
reserve tank, you may need to add off.
coolant to the radiator. Let the 11.If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer 9. Start the engine, and set the check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the tempera- interior temperature to maximum radiator reserve tank. If it has
ture gauge, or lower, before check- (climate control to FULL AUTO at gone down, add coolant to the
ing the radiator. ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on
radiator up to the base of the filler tightly.
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
Removing the radiator cap you can add plain water.
while the engine is hot can Remember to have the cooling
cause the coolant to spray out, system drained and refilled with
seriously scalding you. the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
346
Check Radiator System You can still drive your vehicle even
if this message appears on the multi-
information display, however you
should check the temperature gauge
while driving.
If you notice the temperature gauge

climbing to or above the red mark,
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Follow the instructions on pages
345 and 346 .
If there is a problem with the

radiator system, you will see a

‘‘CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM’’
display (see page 76 ).
If you see this message, the engine

has probably overheated. You should
take your vehicle to a dealer, and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
347
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning indicators. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, or if you
on, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
OIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi- Open the hood, and check the oil SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, the oil pressure level (see page 253 ). An engine information display, the battery is
has dropped very low or lost very low on oil can lose pressure not being charged.
pressure. Serious engine damage is during cornering and other driving
possible, and you should take maneuvers. Immediately turn off all electrical
immediate action. accessories. Try not to use other
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the electrically operated controls such as
level back to the full mark on the the power windows. Keep the engine
dipstick (see page 305 ). running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
damage almost immediately. Turn of f pressure indicator. If it does not go Go to a dealer or a service station
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get out within 10 seconds, turn off the where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. engine. There is a mechanical assistance.
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
360 ).
348
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle battery has been
while driving, or if you see even though it may go off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
a ‘‘CHECK EMISSION continue driving, have the vehicle codes are erased. If takes at least
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- checked by your dealer as soon as three days of normal driving to set
information display, it means one of possible. the codes again.
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even To check if they are set, turn the
though you may feel no difference in ignition to ON (II), without starting
your vehicle’s performance, it can If you keep driving with the the engine. The malfunction
reduce your fuel economy and cause malf unction indicator lamp on, you can indicator lamp will come on for 20
increased emissions. Continued damage your vehicle’s emissions seconds. If it then goes off, the
operation may cause serious damage. controls and engine. Those repairs may readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
not be covered by your vehicle’s times, the readiness codes are not
If you have recently refueled your warranties. set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle, the indicator coming on vehicle for a state emissions test
could be due to a loose or missing Readiness Code until the readiness codes are set.

fuel fill cap. You will also see a Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness Refer to State Emissions Testing
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on codes’’ that are part of the on-board for more information (see page 374 ).
the multi-information display. diagnostics for the emissions
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least systems. In some states, part of the
once (see page 249 ). Tightening the emissions testing is to make sure
cap will not turn the indicator off these codes are set. If they are not
immediately; it takes at least three set, the test cannot be completed.
days of normal driving.
349
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system If the fluid level is low, take your Slow down by shifting to a lower
indicator normally vehicle to a dealer, and have the gear, and pull to the side of the road
comes on when brake system inspected for leaks or when it is safe. Because of the long
you turn the ignition switch to ON worn brake pads. distance needed to stop, it is
(II) and as a reminder to check the hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
parking brake. If you do not release However, if the brake pedal does not should have it towed and repaired as
the parking brake, the indicator will feel normal, you should take soon as possible (see Emergency
stay on, and you will see a immediate action. A problem in one Towing on page 360 ).
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’ part of the system’s dual circuit
message on the multi-information design will still give you braking at
display. two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
If the brake system indicator comes the vehicle begins to slow down, and
on while driving, the brake fluid level you will have to press harder on the
is probably low. You will see a pedal.
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message on
the multi-information display. Press You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
feels normal. If it does, check the information display.
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
311 ).
350
Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
If you must drive the vehicle a short Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA

system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
LID RELEASE LEVER
If the fuel fill door release button To open the fuel fill door, pull the
does not work, use the release lever release lever rearward.

inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.
351
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX INTERIOR FUSE BOX SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side Passenger’s side Driver’s side
NOTCH NOTCH FUSE BOX TAB
The fuses are located in five fuse To open the secondary fuse box lid,
boxes. The interior fuse boxes are push the tab in the direction shown
located under the dashboard on the in the illustration.
driver’s and passenger’s side.
To remove the fuse box lid, put your

finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its
hinges.
352
Fuses
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
TAB
TAB
The primary under-hood fuse box is The secondary under-hood fuse box
in the engine compartment on the is on the battery. To open it, push
driver’s side. To open it, push the the tabs as shown.

tabs as shown.
To check the fuse box, remove the
battery cover first (see page 332 ).
353
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE FUSE

If something electrical in your PULLER
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
357 , 358 , and 359 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown BLOWN
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
(0). Make sure the headlights and the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
all other accessories are off. looking through the top at the wire fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
inside. Removing these fuses pulling out each fuse with the fuse
2. Remove the cover from the fuse requires a Phillips-head puller. The fuse puller is inside the
box. screwdriver. primary under-hood fuse box.
354
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the

BLOWN
without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time,
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem with your
from one of the other circuits with vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
the fuse puller provided in the under- that circuit, and have your vehicle
hood fuse box. Make sure you can checked by a qualified mechanic.
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
5. Look for a blown wire inside the indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with fuse with one of the correct rating as
one of the spare fuses of the same soon as you can.

rating or lower.
Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating. CONTINUED
355
Fuses
If the fuse for the driving position If the radio fuse is removed, the
memory system is removed, all audio system will disable itself. The
stored driving positions will be lost. next time you turn on the radio you
To store the driving positions again, will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
see page 124 . display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
On vehicles with navigation system 199 ).
If the navigation system fuse is
removed, the navigation system will If the fuse for the power tilt
disable itself. The next time you turn telescopic steering is removed, the
on the ignition switch, the system system will be disabled. The system
will require you to enter a PIN needs to be reset after reinstalling
before it can be used. Refer to the the fuse (see page 112 ).
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
356
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 15 A Left headlight low beam 15 40 A Back-up, ACC

2 30 A Rear defroster coil 16 15 A Hazard
3 10 A Left headlight high beam 17 30 A VSA motor
4 15 A Small light 18 40 A VSA
5 10 A Right headlight high beam 19 40 A Drive by wire, Laf heater
6 15 A Right headlight low beam 20 − Not used (OP)
7 7.5 A Back-up 21 40 A Heater motor
8 15 A FI ECU 22 70 A Passenger’s fuse box
9 30 A Wiper 120 A Battery
10 30 A Headlight washer＊ 23 50 A IG main
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX 11 20 A Fog lights 50 A Power window
12 7.5 A MG clutch
13 15 A Horn, Stop ＊: On Canadian models

14 40 A Rear defroster
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 50 A Radiator fan
357
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Driver’s side 1 15 A Drive by Wire 17 20 A Passenger’s power seat sliding
2 15 A Ignition coil 18 15 A ACG
3 10 A Daytime running light 19 20 A Fuel Pump
4 15 A Laf heater 20 15 A IGN SOL
5 7.5 A Radio 21 7.5 A Meter
6 7.5 A Interior light 22 10 A SRS
7 10 A Back-up 23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
8 20 A Door lock 24 20 A Left rear power window
9 20 A Accessory socket 25 20 A ETS (telescopic)
10 7.5 A Occupant position detection 26 20 A ETS (tilt)
system 27 30 A Driver’s power window
11 7.5 A Wiper 28 20 A Moonroof
SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX 12 7.5 A Tire pressure monitoring system 29 7.5 A AFS
Driver’s side 13 20 A Passenger’s power seat reclining 30 7.5 A A/C
14 20 A Driver’s power seat sliding 31 7.5 A SH-AWD
15 10 A Power lumbar support 32 10 A ACC
16 20 A Driver’s power seat reclining 33 (7.5 A) Option
No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 7.5 A Starter diag.
2 7.5 A Starter signal
358
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
Passenger’s side 1 30 A SH-AWD 6 20 A Heated seats
2 30 A Premium amplifier 7 7.5 A Interior lights
3 30 A Passenger’s power window 8 30 A Passenger’s automatic seat
4 30 A Driver’s automatic seat belt belt tensioner
tensioner 9 7.5 A Air conditioner
5 20 A Right rear power window

359
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, The only way you can safely tow
call a professional towing service or your vehicle is with flat-bed
organization. Never tow your vehicle equipment. The operator will load Towing with only two tires on the
with just a rope or chain. It is very your vehicle on the back of a truck. ground will damage parts of the
dangerous. Any other method of towing will all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
damage the drive system. When you should be transported on a f lat-bed
contact the towing agency, inform truck or trailer.
them a flat-bed is required.
360
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, COVER COVER

mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 360 ).
For very short distances, such as

freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts Push
on the anchor in the front bumper.
TETHER
To use the towing hook: The cover is attached to the bumper

1. Remove the cover from the front with a tether.
bumper by pushing the right

corner edge of the cover with a
finger until the cover comes out as
361
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
2. Remove the towing hook and

wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
362
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 364 Emissions Controls........................ 371
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 366 The Clean Air Act ...................... 371
your vehicle, and the location of DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 368 System..................................... 371
includes information you should Treadwear .................................. 368 Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Traction....................................... 368 System..................................... 371
emissions control systems. Temperature .............................. 369 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Tire Labeling .................................. 370 Recovery ................................. 371
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 372
PGM-FI System ..................... 372
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 372
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 372
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 372
Replacement Parts..................... 372
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 373
State Emissions Testing ............... 374
363
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
U.S. vehicle is shown.
364
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into ENGINE NUMBER

the engine block. It is on the front
left, below the valve cover.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
365
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 193.6 in (4,917 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 72.7 in (1,847 mm) 19.4 US gal (73 )
＊1
Height 57.1 in (1,451 mm) Engine Change 1.59 US gal (6.0 )
Wheelbase 110.2 in (2,800 mm) coolant Total 2.27 US gal (8.6 )
Track Front 62.0 in (1,576 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Rear 62.4 in (1,585 mm) Including filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Without filter 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Weights Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Automatic Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. transmission Total 7.9 US qt (7.5 )
fluid
Air Conditioning Rear differential fluid
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) SH-AWD Change 0.77 US qt (0.73 )
Charge quantity 15.8−17.60 oz (450−500 g) differential Total 0.79 US qt (0.75 )
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 case
SH-AWD Change 2.8 US qt (2.7 )
clutch case Total 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Transfer Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
fluid
Windshield U.S. vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canadian 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
reservoir vehicles
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.58 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
366
Specifications
Lights Engine
Headlights＊ (High Beam) 12 V − 60 W Type SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engine
Front turn signal 12 V − 24/2.2 CP (Amber) Bore x Stroke 3.54 x 3.58 in (89 x 93 mm)
Front side marker 12 V − 3 CP Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) Compression ratio 11.0 : 1
Back-up light 12 V − 21 W Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K11
Fog lights 12 V − 55 W DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
License plate lights 12 V − 5W Spark plug gap 0.04 in (1.1 mm) ＋−00.1 mm
Ceiling lights Front 12 V − 8W
Rear 12 V − 8W Alignment
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 5W Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 2 CP Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Trunk light 12 V − 5W Camber Front −0°8’
Rear −1°15’
＊ : Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge Caster Front 2°10’
tube (D2S).
Tires
Battery Size Front/Rear P245/50R17 98V
Capacity 12 V − 55 AH/5 HR Spare T155/70D17 110M
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Fuses Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Interior See page 359 and 360 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of
each fuse box cover.
Under-hood See page 358 or the fuse box
cover.
367
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
368
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
369
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle 17 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described 98 − Load index (a numerical code Maximum Tire Pressure
below. associated with the maximum Max Press − The maximum air
load the tire can carry). pressure the tire can
Tire Size hold.
Whenever tires are replaced, they V − Speed symbol (an
should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating Maximum Tire Load
same size. Following is an example the maximum speed rating). Max Load − The maximum load the
of tire size with an explanation of tire can carry at
what each component means. Tire Identification Number maximum air pressure.
The tire identification number (TIN)
P245/50R17 98V is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
P − Vehicle type (P indicates TIN.
passenger vehicle). DOT B97R FW6X 2202
245 − Tire width in millimeters. DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
50 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section the U.S. Department of
height as a percentage of its Transportation.
width).
B97R − Manufacturer’s
R − Tire construction code (R identification mark.
indicates radial).
FW6X − Tire type code.
370
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act crankcase ventilation valve routes
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ them from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on pages control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 299 and 300 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ canister while the engine is off. After
＊
Carbon monoxide does not contri- In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
371
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. together in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Acura replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converters tion.
multiport fuel injection. are in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, they convert HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
372
Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters A defective three way catalytic

contain precious metals that serve as converter contributes to air pollution,
catalysts, promoting chemical and can impair your engine’s per-
reactions to convert the exhaust formance. Follow these guidelines to
gasses without affecting the metals. protect your vehicle’s three way
The catalytic converters are referred catalytic converters.
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx. Always use unleaded gasoline.
Replacement units must be original Even a small amount of leaded
Acura parts or their equivalent. gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
The three way catalytic converters THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature ineffective.
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any Keep the engine tuned-up.
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away Have your vehicle diagnosed and
from high grass, dry leaves, or other repaired if it is misfiring, back-
flammables. firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
373
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely full (around
of driving under a variety of 3/4).
conditions.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
374
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D. Do not use cruise control. accelerator pedal or the brake
When traffic allows, drive for 90 pedal.
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed If the testing facility determines the
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If readiness codes are still not set, see
you cannot do this for a your dealer.
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
375
376
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 378
Warranty Coverages ..................... 379
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 380

377
Customer Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands:
be able to answer all your questions. Acura Client Services Vortex Motor Corp.
If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7E Bella International
dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Blvd. P.O. Box 190816
satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, CA 90501-2746 San Juan, PR 00919-0816
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager Tel: (800) 382-2238 Tel: (787) 620-7028
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle identification number
management, contact the Acura 715 Milner Avenue (see page 364 )
Client Services Office. Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 Mileage on your vehicle
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Your name, address, and tele-
Toronto (416) 287-4776 phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
378
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Acura accessories are covered under all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two this warranty. Time and mileage 2005 Acura Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are read your warranty manual for coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet.
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Acura
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2005 Warranty
replacement battery. Manual that came with your vehicle.
379
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may either
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of Washington D.C. area) or write to:
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Administration (NHTSA), in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Transportation, Washington,
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, other information about motor
or Acura Automobile Division, vehicle safety from the Hotline.
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
380
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Publication Form Description Price pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Form Number Each＊ Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
61SJA00 2005 Acura RL $77.00
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual Base Book PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Qty
Price Total
61SJA00EL 2005 Acura RL $47.00 ２ Name Year Each＊ Price

０
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ０
61SJA30 2005 Acura RL $44.00 ５
Body Repair Manual
31SJA600 2005 Acura RL Owner’s Manual $42.00
Ａ
Ｃ
31SJA700 2005 Acura RL Navigation Manual $29.00 Ｕ
31SJAM00 2005 Acura RL $12.00
Maintenance Journal ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SJAQ00 2005 Acura RL Quick Start Guide $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE Add 6% Sales Tax
Indicate Year and Model Desired Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. allow adequate time for delivery.
GRAND TOTAL
381
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Ｐ Customer Name Attention
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
382
Index
A Automatic Lighting........................ 105 Brakes

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22 Anti-lock Brake
Accessories..................................... 255 Automatic Speed Control.............. 201 System (ABS)......................... 275
ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch Automatic Transmission............... 265 Break-in, New Linings .............. 248
Position) ...................................... 115 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 366 Fluid ............................................ 311
Accessory Power Sockets............. 156 Checking Fluid Level ................ 310 Parking ........................................ 151
Acura Link ...................................... 208 Shifting ........................................ 265 System Indicator .................. 61, 350
Adaptive Front Lighting System Shift Lever Position Wear Indicators ......................... 274
(AFS) ........................................... 107 Indicators ................................ 265 Braking System.............................. 274
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 305 Shift Lever Positions ................. 265 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 248
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 25 Shift Lock Release ..................... 270 Brightness Control,
Air Conditioning............................. 162 Instruments ................................ 109
Usage .......................................... 163 B Brights, Headlights ....................... 104
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 326 Bulb Replacement
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 248 Battery Back-up Lights ........................... 320
Antifreeze ....................................... 308 Charging System Front Fog Lights........................ 318
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Indicator............................ 60, 348 Front Position Lights ................ 317
Indicator ................................ 62, 275 Jump Starting ............................. 343 Front Side Marker Lights......... 317
Operation .................................... 275 Maintenance ............................... 331 Headlights .................................. 314
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 199 Cover ........................................... 322 Specifications ............................. 367
Anti-theft Steering Column Specifications ............................. 367 Turn Signal Lights............. 316, 320
Lock ............................................. 115 Before Driving ............................... 247 Built-in-key ...................................... 128
Ashtrays .......................................... 157 Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
INDEX
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 314
Audio System ................................. 171 Beverage Holders .......................... 154
Auto Control Mode, Starting Booster Seats ................................... 51
Engine ......................................... 263
I
Index
C Risks with Airbags....................... 37 Cup Holders.................................... 154

Small Children.............................. 42 Customer Service Office .............. 378
Capacities Chart............................. 366 Tethers.......................................... 49 Customize Settings .......................... 78
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 37 Door/Window Setup ................... 94
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 257 Child Seats ........................................ 42 KEYLESS ACCESS Setup .......... 88
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii LATCH.......................................... 45 Lighting Setup .............................. 91
CD Care .......................................... 196 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 49 Meter Setup .................................. 82
CD Error Message ........................ 197 Childproof Door Locks ................. 118 Position Setup............................... 85
CD Changer.................................... 187 Cleaning Setting to Default ......................... 80
Ceiling Lights ................................. 160 Seat Belts .................................... 321 Wiper Setup .................................. 99
Certification Label ......................... 364 Climate Control System ................ 162
Chains, Tires .................................. 329 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 371 D
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 337 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 263
Changing Oil Compact Spare Tire....................... 336 DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
How to ......................................... 306 Console Compartment .................. 155 Dashboard .................................... 4, 58
When to....................................... 291 Consumer Information.................. 378 Daytime Running Lights............... 106
Charging System Indicator .... 60, 348 Controls, Instruments and .............. 57 Daytime Running Lights
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 262 Coolant Indicator ........................................ 64
Child Safety ...................................... 36 Adding ......................................... 308 Dead Battery .................................. 343
Booster Seats ............................... 51 Checking ..................................... 253 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 380
Child Seats .................................... 43 Proper Solution .......................... 308 Defogger, Rear Window ............... 110
Important Safety Temperature Gauge .................... 68 Defrosting the Windows ............... 168
Reminders ................................ 36 Crankcase Emissions Control Differential Fluid ........................... 366
Infants ........................................... 41 System......................................... 371 Dimensions ..................................... 366
Larger Children ........................... 50 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 64 Dimming the Headlights .............. 104
LATCH.......................................... 45 Cruise Control Operation ............. 201
II
Index
Dipstick Charging System Indicator ...... 348 Overheating................................ 345

Automatic Transmission........... 310 Checking the Fuses................... 354 Specifications ............................. 367
Engine Oil ................................... 253 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 109 Speed Limiter ............................. 270
Directional Signals......................... 104 Jump Starting ............................. 343 Starting........................................ 263
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 274 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 348 Engine Speed Limiter.................... 270
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 307 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 349 Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 248
Doors Opening the Fuel Fill Door Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 371
Locking and Unlocking ............. 116 Manually ................................. 351 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 54
Lockout Prevention ................... 116 Overheated Engine ................... 345 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Monitor Indicator ........................ 60 Towing ........................................ 360 System......................................... 372
Power Door Locks ..................... 116 Emergency Brake .......................... 151 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 368 Emergency Flashers ..................... 109 Belts by ......................................... 19
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7 Emergency Towing ....................... 360
Driver’s ID ........................................ 86 Emergency Trunk Opener ........... 118 F
Driving ............................................ 261 Emissions Controls........................ 371
Economy ..................................... 254 Emissions Testing, State .............. 374 Fan, Interior.................................... 164
Driving Position Memory Engine Features .......................................... 161
System......................................... 124 Check Starting System ............. 264 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 249
Compartment Covers ................ 304 Filters
E Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 68 Oil ................................................ 306
If It Won’t Start .......................... 341 Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 109
Economy, Fuel ............................... 254 Malfunction Indicator Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 337
Emergencies................................... 335 Lamp ................................. 60, 349
INDEX
Floor Mats ...................................... 322
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 343 Oil life .......................................... 291
Brake System Indicator ............ 350 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 60, 348
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 337 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 305 CONTINUED
III
Index
Fluids G Headlights
Automatic Transmission........... 310 Adaptive Front Lighting System
Brake ........................................... 311 Gas Mileage Improving................. 254 (AFS)....................................... 107
Power Steering........................... 312 Gasoline .......................................... 248 Aiming ......................................... 314
Windshield Washer ................... 310 Gauge ............................................ 68 Automatic Lighting ................... 105
Fog Lights ...................................... 106 Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 64 Daytime Running Lights .......... 106
Four-way Flashers ......................... 109 Octane Requirement ................. 248 High Beam Indicator ................... 64
Front Airbags ............................. 11, 27 Tank, Refueling ......................... 249 Lights On Indicator ..................... 62
Front Seat ....................................... 119 Gas Station Procedures................. 249 Low Beams, Turning on ........... 104
Adjusting..................................... 119 Gauges .............................................. 68 Reminder Chime........................ 104
Heaters........................................ 142 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 68 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 314
Airbags .................................... 11, 27 Fuel ................................................ 68 High beams, Turning on ........... 104
Air Ventilation ............................ 143 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Washer＊＊ .................................... 102
Fuel .................................................. 248 Rating) ........................................ 284 Head Restraints ............................. 120
Check Fuel Cap.......................... 250 Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 265 Heated Mirror ................................ 123
Fill Door and Cap....................... 249 Glove Box ....................................... 153 Heater, Seat .................................... 142
Gauge ............................................ 68 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight High Altitude, Starting at .............. 264
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 64 Rating) ........................................ 284 HomeLink Universal
Octane Requirement ................. 248 Transceiver................................. 204
Opening the Fuel Fill Door H Hood, Opening the ........................ 251
Manually ................................. 351 Horn................................................. 101
Oxygenated ................................ 248 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 314
Tank, Refueling ......................... 249 Hands Free LinkTM ......................... 231 I
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 354 Hazard Warning Flashers............. 109
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 364
IV
Index
Ignition Turn Signal and Hazard Keyless Access Remote ................ 128
Keys............................................. 113 Warning .................................... 63 Keyless Memory Settings ............ 134
Switch .......................................... 115 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) ... 63
Timing Control System ............. 372 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59 L
Immobilizer System....................... 114 Infant Restraint ................................ 41
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Infant Seats ....................................... 41 Label, Certification ........................ 364
Indicators .......................................... 60 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 49 Lane Change, Signaling ................ 104
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 325 Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 21
System) ............................. 62, 275 Inside Mirror .................................. 122 Lights On Indicator ......................... 62
Brake (Parking and Brake Inspection, Tire .............................. 326 Lights
System) ............................. 61, 274 Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Bulb Replacement ..................... 314
Charging System ................. 60, 348 Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 109 Indicator ........................................ 59
Cruise Control .............................. 64 Interface Dial ................. 163, 171, 208 Position ....................................... 104
DRL (Daytime Running Interior Lights ................................ 160 Turn Signal ................................. 104
Lights)....................................... 64 Introduction ......................................... i Load Limit ...................................... 283
High Beam.................................... 64 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 115
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 62 J Locks
Low Fuel ....................................... 64 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 115
Low Oil Pressure ................. 60, 348 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 338 Childproof Door ......................... 118
Low Tire Pressure Jack, Tire ........................................ 337 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 249
Indicator............................ 65, 277 Jump Starting ................................. 343 Glove Box ................................... 153
Message ........................................ 66 Power Door ................................ 116
K Trunk .......................................... 117
INDEX
SH-AWD ....................................... 65
Side Airbag Off ............................ 61 Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 121
SRS ................................................ 61 Keys ................................................. 113 Low Coolant Level ......................... 253
Keyless Access System................. 127 CONTINUED
V
Index
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 64 MP3 ................................................. 193 OnStar ............................................. 217
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 348 Multi-Information Display .............. 69 Outside Mirrors ............................. 123
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 366 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 71
Luggage, Storing ........................... 257 N Overheating, Engine ..................... 345
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 298
M Neutral Gear Position.................... 266 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 248
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 248
Maintenance ................................... 289 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i P
Main Items ................................. 299 Numbers, Identification ................ 364
Minder......................................... 291 Paddle Shifters ............................... 267
Owner’s Maintenance O Panel Brightness Control ............. 109
Checks .................................... 298 Park Gear Position......................... 266
Record .................................. 301-302 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 248 Parking ............................................ 266
Safety........................................... 290 Odometer .......................................... 70 Parking Brake ................................ 151
Schedule .............................. 291-300 Odometer, Trip ................................ 70 Parking Brake and Brake
Sub Items .................................... 300 Oil System Indicator .................. 61, 350
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 60, 349 Change, How to ......................... 306 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 373
Memory, Driving Position ............ 124 Change, When to ....................... 291 PGM-FI System.............................. 372
Message Display .............................. 76 Checking Engine ....................... 253 Power Door Locks ......................... 116
Message Indicator ........................... 66 Life, Engine ................................ 291 Power Socket Locations................ 156
Meters, Gauges ................................ 68 Pressure Indicator ............... 60, 348 Power Windows ............................. 145
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 248 Selecting Proper Viscosity Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 122 Chart ....................................... 305 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13
Modifications.................................. 255 ON (Ignition Switch Position) ...... 115 Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 256 Onboard Refueling Vapor Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Moonroof ................................. 147-150 Recovery ..................................... 371 Protecting Children ......................... 36
VI
Index
Protecting Infants ........................ 41 Replacing Seat Belts After a System Components.................... 21

Protecting Larger Children ........ 50 Crash ............................................. 23 Use During Pregnancy................ 19
Protecting Small Children .......... 42 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 253 Seat Heaters ................................... 142
Using Child Seats with Restraint, Child ................................ 36 Seat Position Memory ................... 124
Tethers...................................... 49 Reverse Gear Position................... 266 Seat Ventilation＊＊ .......................... 143
Using LATCH .............................. 45 Roof Rack ....................................... 259 Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 119
Rotation, Tire ................................. 327 Security System ............................. 200
R Sequential Sports Shift Mode ...... 267
S Paddle Shifters ........................... 267
Radiator Overheating .................... 345 Serial Number ................................ 364
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 171 Safety Belts................................. 10, 21 Service Intervals ............................ 291
Readiness Codes ............................ 349 Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 380 Service Manual＊ ............................ 381
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 320 Safety Features .................................. 9 Service Station Procedures .......... 249
Rear View Mirror........................... 122 Airbags .......................................... 11 SH-AWD ......................................... 272
Rear Window Defogger ................ 110 Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Torque Distribution Monitor ... 272
Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 119 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 55 Indicator ........................................ 65
Reminder Indicators ........................ 60 Safety Messages ................................ ii Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 265
Remote ............................................ 128 Satellite Digital Radio .................... 181 Shift Lock Release ......................... 270
Replacement Information Seat Belts .................................... 10, 21 Side Airbags ............................... 11, 30
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 306 Additional Information ................ 21 How the Side Airbag off
Fuses ........................................... 352 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner .. 22 Indicator Works ....................... 33
Light Bulbs ................................. 314 Cleaning ...................................... 321 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
Schedule ..................................... 291 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 21
INDEX
Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 32
Tires ............................................ 325 Maintenance ................................. 23 How Your Side Curtain
Wiper Blades .............................. 323 Reminder Indicator and Airbags Work ........................... 32
Beeper ................................. 21, 60 CONTINUED
VII
Index
Side Marker Lights, Bulb State Emissions Testing ............... 374 Temperature Gauge ........................ 68
Replacement in .......................... 317 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 345 Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 170
Signaling Turns .............................. 104 Steering Wheel Temperature, Outside ..................... 71
Snow Tires ...................................... 329 Adjustments ............................... 111 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 49
Sound System ................................. 171 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 115 Three Way Catalytic
Spare Tire Position Memory ....................... 124 Converters .................................. 373
Inflating ....................................... 336 Steering Wheel Buttons/ Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Specifications ............................. 367 Switches ...................................... 198 Wheel .......................................... 111
Specifications Charts..................... 366 Stereo Sound System .................... 171 Timing Belt ..................................... 313
Speed Limiter ................................. 270 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 333 Tire Chains ..................................... 329
Spotlights ........................................ 160 Sun Visors ....................................... 156 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 337
SRS, Additional Information........... 24 Supplemental Restraint Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35 System................................. 11, 24 (TPMS) ................................... 277
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32 Servicing ....................................... 34 Monitoring Tire Pressure
How Your Airbags SRS Indicator.......................... 32, 61 Reading ................................... 329
Work ............................. 27, 30, 32 System Components.................... 24 TPMS System Warning ............ 280
SRS Components ......................... 24 Synthetic Oil ................................... 305 Tires ................................................ 325
SRS Service................................... 34 Air Pressure ............................... 326
SRS Indicator.............................. 32, 61 T Chains ......................................... 329
START (Ignition Switch Checking Wear .......................... 326
Position) ...................................... 115 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 335 Compact Spare ........................... 336
Starting the Engine........................ 263 Technical Descriptions DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 368
Auto Control Mode.................... 263 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 368 Inflation ....................................... 325
In Cold Weather at High Emissions Control Systems ...... 371 Inspection ................................... 326
Altitude ................................... 263 Three Way Catalytic Replacing .................................... 328
With a Dead Battery ................. 343 Converters .............................. 373 Rotating....................................... 327
VIII
Index
Snow ............................................ 329 U Warranty Coverages ..................... 379

Specifications ............................. 367 Washer, Windshield
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 337 Unexpected, Taking Care Checking the Fluid Level ......... 310
Torque Distribution Monitor of the ........................................... 335 Operation .................................... 102
(SH-AWD) .................................. 272 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 368 Wheels
Towing Unleaded Gasoline......................... 248 Adjusting the Steering .............. 111
A Trailer ...................................... 283 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 307 Alignment and Balance ............. 327
Emergency Wrecker ................. 360 Compact Spare ........................... 336
Equipment and Accessories ..... 284 V Nut Wrench ................................ 338
Weight Limit .............................. 283 Windows
TPMS .............................................. 277 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 258 Auto Reverse .............................. 146
Trailer Loading .............................. 283 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 366 Operating the Power ................. 145
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 287 Vehicle Identification Number..... 364 Rear, Defogger .......................... 110
Transmission Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Windshield
Checking Fluid Level, System..................................... 281 Cleaning ...................................... 102
Automatic ............................... 310 VSA System Indicator ......... 63, 281 Defroster .................................... 165
Fluid Selection............................ 310 VSA Activation Indicator .... 63, 281 Washers ...................................... 102
Identification Number ............... 364 VSA Off Switch .......................... 282 Wipers, Windshield
Shifting the Automatic .............. 265 Vehicle Storage .............................. 333 Changing Blades ........................ 323
Treadwear ...................................... 336 VIN .................................................. 364 Operation .................................... 102
Trip Meter ........................................ 70 Viscosity, Oil................................... 305 Summer/Winter Position ......... 103
Trunk............................................... 117 Worn Tires ..................................... 326
Emergency Opener ................... 118 W
INDEX
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 360
Opening the ................................ 117
Open Monitor Indicator ........ 13, 77 WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Turn Signals ................................... 104 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 55
IX
Index
X
XM Satellite Radio ......................... 182
＊
: U.S. only
＊＊
: Canada only
X
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline, Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
pump octane number of 91 or Transmission Fluid) preferred, or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
higher. a DEXRON III ATF as a DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
temporary replacement. replacement (see page 311 ).
Fuel Tank Capacity:
19.4 US gal (73 ) Capacity: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
SH-AWD differential case Front:
Recommended Engine Oil: 0.77 US qt (0.73 ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
API Premium grade 5W-20 SH-AWD clutch case
detergent oil (see page 305 ). 2.8 US qt (2.7 ) Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including Transfer Assembly Fluid:
filter): SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity Spare Tire Pressure:
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) hypoid gear oil, API service 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Power Steering Fluid:
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or Honda Power Steering Fluid
a DEXRON III ATF as a preferred, or another brand of
temporary replacement (see page power steering fluid as a
310 ). temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 312 ).

Acura RL Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Acura RL Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2005 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

OWNER This owner’s manual should be

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

INSTRUMENT PANEL CEILING CONSOLE＊1 MIRROR CONTROL

POWER WINDOW INTERFACE DIAL

INSTRUMENT WINDSHIELD HAZARD WARNING

Your Vehicle at a Glance

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SEAT HEATER

＊2 : Canadian models only

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

(7) (11) However, you and your passengers

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Introduction Your vehicle has a door monitor

Driver and Passenger Safety

See pages 36 − 40 for important

When one or more doors are not

Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Locking the doors also helps prevent

See page 130 for how to lock the

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Driver and Passenger Safety

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

Driver and Passenger Safety

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or

Driver and Passenger Safety

To deactivate the locking When the tensioners are activated,

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbag System Components

(8) (9) (2)

(1) Driver’s Airbag

Your airbag system includes:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Two side airbags, one for the

Driver and Passenger Safety

This can happen if the severity of a

Driver and Passenger Safety

For both advanced airbags to work

Driver and Passenger Safety

If the indicator comes on at any

If the indicator comes on or

Driver and Passenger Safety

When you turn the ignition to ON

Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not remove or modify a front

All Children Must Be Restrained

Driver and Passenger Safety

To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD